uc-Mm.iv THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA A TRANSLATION OF THE KUAN HUA CHIH NAN WITH AN ESSAY ON TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE AND A GLOSSARY OF PHliASES BT L. C. HOPKINS H.M. Consular Service, China SHANGHAI KKl.l.Y * WALSH. I.I3IITKI). THK HCM> * - NANKING i ASD AT HO.VJKi'N(,. YuKOHAMA AND SINGAPORE 1895 THE- -JOHN -FRYER- CHINESE-LIBRARY 7/3- >. THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA By the same Author : Demy 8vo, 82 pp. Cloth. Price $1.00. "THE SIX SCRIPTS" A TRANSLATION OF w =>- Liu Shu Ku THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA A TRANSLATION OF THE "KUAN HUA CHIH NAN" WITH AN ESSAY ON TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE AND A GLOSSARY OF PHRASES BY L. C. HOPKINS H.M. Consular Service, China SHANGHAI KELLY & WALSH, LIMITED, THE BUND & NANKING ROAD AND AT HONGKONG, YOKOHAMA AND SINGAPORE i 8 9 a JOHN FRYER CHINESE LIBRARY TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. I I Few foreign residents in China will, I suppose, challenge the proposition that to speak of a man as a Sinologue is to think of him as a fool. Let me then hasten, in the interests of my publishers and myself, to assure the gentle, the candid, and the general reader, that the perusal of this volume need leave no one more foolish than he was before. This firm confidence in the harmlessness of the f present work may be had because from a sinologic standpoint u there is nothing in it." Whether the Chinese of antiquity said "hioei 1 guk" or "fan 5 dam\" whence they came these ancient but objurgatory speakers from Babylon, from Accad, or Assyria, and who they were, Chaldees or Bittites, Proto-Medians or Ugro-Altaics, the lost Ten Tribes or natives of some old-world Parish of Stepney ; whether the / King is a phallic gospel or a pocket dictionary ; where in the world Ta Ts'in and T'iao-chih could have been ; and precisely how much remains of LAO Tzu after being translated by BALFOUR and analysed by GILES, on these and kindred topics the Kuan Hua Chili Nan will throw no gleam of light. Mr. GOH'S text is modern, work-a-day and practical, written in excellent Pekinese of the present time, not of two hundred years ago, and, by common consent of both northern natives and foreign students, 751488 11 is as useful as it is idiomatic. Having heard a good many of my friends express their opinion that the work merited an English translation, and no one else showing any inclination to make it, I undertook the task. I have added to the translation, the Chinese text of which I regret that I have not been able to obtain permission to reprint, a Glossary, and a monograph on Tone and Accent in Pekinese, both of which I somewhat faintly hope may be found of assistance at least to those, who are entering on the study of this unhappy language. My sincere thanks are due to Messrs. BULLOCK and JORDAN, of H.B.M. Legation, Peking, and to the Revd. G. OWEN, of that city, for their ungrudging and valuable assistance upon many doubtful points that came to light in the compilation of the Glossary. Finally, I am deeply indebted to Mr. W. H. WILKINSON, of H.B.M. Consulate, Swatow, for seeing the whole work through the press, a labour which, at all times irksome, must have been with the Glossary almost as revolting as its preparation. L. C. HOPKINS. CONTENTS. PACK. Part I i II ... 10 HI 70 IV 96 Essay on Tone and Accent in Pekinese 130 Glossary of Phrases 138 . THE, .. GUIDE TO A TRANSLATION OF THE "KUAN HUA CHIH NAN" PART I. No, 1 What is your honoured surname ? b. My poor surname is Wu. a. May I ask your eminent Style ? b. My humble Style is Tzii-ching. a. How many distinguished brothers have you ? b. There are three of us. a. And what province do you come from, Sir ? b. My lowly home is in the capital of Honan. a. Is your residence situated inside the city ? b. Yes, inside the city. a. I am delighted to make your acquaintance, and I must apologise for not having done so before. No, 2 What is your venerable age now, Sir ? b. I have wasted some sixty years. a. The world has gone well with you ; you are quite robust, and neither your hair nor beard are very grey. b. Many thanks ! But my hair and beard have turned half white already. a. Well I am just fifty this year, and most of my beard has turned before this. No. 3 . What is your distinguished surname, and your noted name ? b. My poor surname is Chang, my official name is Shou Hsien. a. What is your distinguished place in the family ? b. I am the eldest. 2 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART I . And the honoured year of your birth? b. Oh, I am still very young, twenty-four this year. a. What position do you hold, Sir ? b. I am in business a'. T'ungchow and a friend of your esteemed uncle, and for that rcapoa i made a point of coining to present my compliment;; to you. a. You are very kind ! ^\lay I inquire the name of your Firm? b. My little business is styled Hsin Ch'ang. No. 4 I'm delighted to meet you again for I've been longing to see you. ' I heard early this morning you had arrived, so I came on purpose to inquire after you. b. Thank you, I'm very much obliged. I should have come to call upon you, but I only got here late yesterday evening and, as none of my baggage is ready nor my boxes unpacked and I haven't changed the clothes I was wearing, you'll excuse my not returning your call till to-morrow. a. Don't mention it ! No. 5 How do you do ! I haven't seen you about these last few days, and you've been a great deal in my thoughts. You must have been ill again I'm afraid. b. Yes indeed I have. a. You had just recovered the day I saw you, but you are not looking yourself yet. I suspect you must have gone out and had another attack. b. I have caught a chill, and I feel headachy and sore all over. a. Well, the only way is to send for a doctor and be properly attended to. No. 6 You really and truly cannot believe that man. Everything he utters is a gross exaggeration. b. You will have your trouble for nothing if you depend on what he says. Haven't you found out the sort of man he is yet ? Why, he has a perfect passion for exaggeration and brags and boasts to any extent ; if you put any faith in what he tells you, you'll infallibly be let in. No. 7 Have you quite recovered from your recent indisposition ? b. Thank you, quite. My cough is not so troublesome. a. You've had a long attack this time, and though you are well again now, you must ask your doctor to give you a tonic, and keep quiet and take care of yourself. b. Yes ; thank you very much for your kind attention. NOTE. The Chinese text here requires some alteration. 1'ART 1 THE GT T IPE TO KUAN-HUA. 3 No. 8 a. While you're here you should make yourself at home, don't stand on ceremony. />. Thank you, you are very kind ! I'm not doing so. a. That's all right then ! And after this, if I want anything I shan't hesitate to apply to you. b. Anything you will let me do, I shall take as a favour. No. 9 Thank you very much for the tea you were so kind as to send me yesterday. Its flavour is excellent. b. Don't mention it. During my last visit to Ch'ung An, I spent two days in the Bohea Hills, and just bought a little tea there. You must excuse my sending such a trifling quantity. a. Not at all ! Friendship is essentially a matter of feeling, not one of . s. d. No. 10 . Where are you off to ? b. I want to make a call on Chang lao shih. a. Oh ! well I wish you would remember me to him and say I don't forget him ; tell him, when he's got time, I wish he would drop in. b. Some days ago, when I was with him, he was asking me to remember him to yourself. He has not been able to go out on account of his wife's being out of sorts. No. 11 a- Everybody must be truthful in what they say. b. There is no doubt about that. Anything like lying and cheating, when people find it out, brings disgrace to a man. a. Your view exactly coincides with my own opinion. No. 12 Do you think this thing is real or imitation ? b. An imitation, I think. a. I think so too, but as I can't tell for certain whether it is or not, I don't like to say so. /;. No, you haven't examined how coarse the carving is, and the want of lustre in the colouring. No. 13 . We are both out of employment at present ; what's to be done ? b. What do you think there is to be done ? a. I think we are very hard up ; neither you nor I have any capital to start a business on our own account, and we don't know any trade to earn wages by as shopmen. 4 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART I b. Well, if that's the case, we must starve then ! a. But after all, Providence doesn't bring anybody into the world to be quite destitute. We shall think of something by- and-by. No. 14 I should like to walk out there but I don't feel inclined to go by myself. b. I'd like a walk too, but it's dull without a companion, so what do you say to our going together ? a. Oh, if you would join me it would be very convenient to me. No. 15 Q" You speak in such a low tone that a great deal that you say people don't hear distinctly. b. I have by nature not a strong voice, and besides I don't like bawling out loud at people, and so the sounds uttered are low. a. But the pitch of the voice matters considerably in talking, for if the pitch is right, it will be audible naturally, and if the enunciation is distinct, it follows that there will be nothing lost. NO. 16 Did you hear what I said to him behind the screen just now ? b. No, I didn't. I've been rather deaf lately. a. Well anyhow, please don't on any account divulge it, as it's a secret. b. Then I certainly won't go and do harm by talking. No. 17 Do you understand Chinese ? b. A little, but the Amoy language is not much understood elsewhere. a. Chinese no doubt is difficult; each place has its own dialect, though Mandarin passes current throughout. b. I am told that Mandarin itself has two pronunciations, a northern and a southern. a. The accent in northern and southern Mandarin is different, the pronunciation of the words is much the same. No. 18 How do you do once more ! Do you remember me ? b. Your face seems quite familiar, but I don't recollect where we met. I must really apologise, but I don't like to address you by name quite at random. a. What, have you forgotten our having taken wine together at the same table, the year before last, at Chang Erh's place ? b. Now you mention it I do remember you ; you are Mr. Ho Erh. TART I THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 5 No. 19 a. How do you do ! I hope you arc well. I want you to do something for me. b. Pray tell me what it is. a. I recollect seeing in a newspaper two days ago mention of a Mr. Chu, an admirable scroll-writer, whom I hear you know. Might I ask you to introduce me to him. b. Oh that will be easy enough ; I will not fail to oblige you, don't trouble but leave it to me. No. 20 Of all the celebrated spots we have visited, the scenery on the hill we came to at noon to-day was best. b. Yes, and I liked most the mile or so of path through the bamboos outside the Halfway Lodge. a. And best of all when, after following that path, we turned a corner and sat on that big rock. How refreshing it was to listen to the brook. NOTE. The Chinese text here requires some alteration. No. 21 Did you return early or late from your trip on the lake yesterday ? b. It was after midnight when we got back. a. I should think the moon last night was beautiful, and the scene on the lake must have been especially fine. b. The view by night is even better than by day, quite twice as fine. No. 22 This temple is very large. b. Very; it is supposed to be the largest about here, and behind there is a very high pagoda. a. Can one go up it? b. It had a staircase to one storey which has been taken away now, so one can't go up. a. Why did they take away the stairs ? b. Because so many people went up and were continually doing wanton damage. No. 23 a. The moon was so beautiful last night before midnight that I lay on the kang looking at the moonbeams shining on the window, and couldn't bring myself to go to sleep. b. However, when it grew late, the wind suddenly sprang up, the sky was full of dark, scudding clouds, and there was very heavy thunder. 6 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART I a. I suppose that was after I had gone to sleep, though I know it was raining last night. No. 24 How can you go out just now in this fierce sun and dreadful heat? b. But I have important business ; I must go out. a. Well, even if you have, you ought to hold on a while, and wait till the sun goes down a bit and it is a little cooler, before starting. /;. Very well. No. 25 . At daylight this morning, when I got up and went oi>t to the rear, I saw a very thick frost on the roof. b. Then there was a heavy frost last night ! That accounts for my waking up about 4 in the morning, feeling very cold, and wishing my cotton coverlet was not so thin. No. 26 It is l&te ; I think it must be o o'clock by now. b. Just now I heard the clock go ding dong, it seemed to strike two. a. I'm afraid that clock is not right; I'll look at my watoh. The watch makes it three. b. Then the clock is certainly slow. No. 27 Which of the Four Seasons do you prefer ? b. They each of them have their advantages. a. Which do you like best ? b. You needn't ask that ! Who does not delight in the flowers and fragrance of balmy Spring, and who not does not fear the heats of Summer and the chills of Autumn, and worst of all the great cold of Winter ? a. I like both Spring and Autumn. No. 28 Where is the school I hear you go to ? b. It's at that corner, the doorway with the poster. a. Who is the Master ? b. His name is Mr. Chin. a. How many school-fellows have you ? b. Not many. No. 29 Have you read the Dynastic Histories ? b. No, I have not. PART I THE GUIDE TO KUAN-IIUA. 7 . Educated people should not fail to read them ; it is by them that one understands the rise and fall of dynasties, and the virtues and vices of mankind. b. What are you doing in caligraphy ? a. Wang Yu -chin's writing copies. b. Capital ! No. 30 . What sort of a teacher is your Master ? b. Very good; he explains passages most carefully, he - writes a very pretty hand, takes a great deal of pains in correcting our compositions, doesn't ignore the least merits we have, he's correct in his own habits and strict about discipline. a. With such a good Master as that, it' you choose to take pains, there's no fear of your not making progress in your studies. NO. 31 a. Mr. Priest ! b. In the name of Ainita ! a. Is the head priest in ? b. The head priest went out yesterday. a. May I ask your name in religion ? b. I am called Liao K'ung. a. What is your lay name ? b. My lay name is Ku. a. You've a large piece of land here ; what a pity no one has laid it out in - grounds. b. This land is no good ; the soil is so salt that nothing that's planted will grow. No. 32 . To-day being your honoured father's birthday, I have come for the purpose of offering my congratulations, and I've prepared a small present which I beg you will do me the honour of accepting. Pray don't decline it on any account. Would you also. kindly take me and present me to your father, to convey my congratulations. b. You are too kind ! I am really very much obliged to you for your trouble. No. 33 a- Oh dear, what a good-for-nothing child this is ! All day long idling his time away, and doing nothing that's right. b. Don't his father and mother look after him ? 8 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HI A. PART I a. If he's allowed to go on in this way, doing exactly as he pleases, why he'll never stop at all. 6. I should advise them to bury him alive and hare done with him. No. 34 . Whatever you do, in order to come to the front, you must work hard to get on, and not be your own enemy. b. That's all very well ; bat I am satisfied if I don't neglect my duties. I cannot do as some people do, and simply make sodden displays of zeal, or cringe to people and do their dirty work for them. I can't bring myself to do such miserable tricks. No. 35 a- The Emperor is certain to be pleased with good public servants, and as certain to be angry with the incompetent ; and it rests with each individual what his own character shall be. b. That goes without saying. It is beyond all doubt that strict integrity brings understanding of public business, while if a man has only ordinary abilities, and is in the habit of taking money besides, he will soon have to go home and nurse the baby. No. 36 <* The present members of the Central Government are men of character and talents, and zealous in the discharge of their duties ; the consequence is. that the provincial authorities follow their good example. b. An example is always required to be set and to be followed respectively. If those in the higher ranks are not venal, their subordinates dare not be extortionate. No. 37 a- He came several times and I never took much notice of him, but still he has the shameless effrontery to be always coming here. He really is perfectly dead to all sense of right or wrong. b. He's a bullying, cowardly blusterer, I don't call him a man. Don't ever take any notice of him, and then of course he won't come. No. 38 a. I wonder what family that girl belongs to that passed just now ; she is elegant and dignified too. To-morrow I shall make a proposal on behalf of my relative. Yes, that is a really nice girl. b. I recognise her as one of Mr. Chang Erh's children. It would be a suitable match, were you to speak on behalf of your relative. No. 39 a- That's a good child, that : Up to working at night, and able to make a living ; persevering, too, and trustworthy. One can't help liking him. I 'ART 1 THE Gl II >K T< KIAN-HUA. b. You think so .' I consider him very idle, lie's asleep as soon as it's dark. That'* a question like the heancurd .strung' oil a horsehair, not to he raised, as the saying goe-. nuite puts me out of temper. No. 40 . I have always had so many benefits from yon that \ could never, in any case, cease to be thankful, and now I've received this further favour, J don't know how 1 am to repay your kindness in being so good to me as you have lcen. b. Oh, not at all ! There is no need for you to be so grateful for this slight service. No. 41 When one's teeth are gone, one cannot chew one's food, and it has to be stewed to a pulp. Don't have food done so fearfully hard and tough that you can't eat it. b. My teeth are better than yours. I can eat anything ; tough or brittle it makes no difference. I can even crack melon- seeds with my teeth. No. 42 ////// yon some day. a. That would bo even better. May I ask, were you in business once ? b. Yes, I was. n. What was your business? I. I kept a druggist's store. a. In the Chinese city ? h. In the Chinese city. n. Do you still keep it ? />. Oh no. I closed it seven or eight years ngo. a. Indeed, and what is your present occupation .' /;. I practise medicine at present. a. In your practice do yon merely receive patients, or do yon visit them as well ? b. In the morning I receive, after noon L pay visits. a. No doubt you find medicine better than trade. b. Well no. There's no other advantage beyond that it has not the same anxieties as trade. a. Where is your residence, sir ? b. I live in the Paofang Hutung, East Ssfi Pailou. a. I shall come and call upon you soon at yonr house. /;. Thank you ! In a day or two I shall call also on you at yonr hotel. a. You are very kind. Any time you are disengaged yon might come to my inn for a chat. b. Yes ; then au reroir ! No. 3 a - Have you come from home, sir? b, Yes, from home. a. You haven't yet fixed when you start, have yon ? b. Well, it will be in four or five days time, and I came to-day on purpose to take leave of you. a. It is exceedingly polite of you. Are yon taking yonr family too this time? b. Oh yes, I intend to take my family too. a. Are you travelling in company or alone? b. In company. a. Is your fellow traveller also in the Government service ? 14 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IT b. He is. He's a recently nominated Assistant Sub-Prefect by purchase, leaving the capital to serve his Expectancy. a. And I suppose, as soon as you reach the provincial capital you will take up your post ? b. Probably. . Is your appointment an Arduous Post ? b. No, an Easy Post. a. And what is the name of the man who is now acting there? b. It i* a man named Chou. . Does he hold a substantive appointment? , b. Yes. He has quite recently been appointed to a post too; so when I reach mine, he will hand over charge and go and take up his new appointment. a. Well, I suppose for these few days you remain at home, don't you ? b. I do, yes. a. Then during the next day or two I shall call at your house to bid you good-bye. />. You are very good. And now I must be getting back. a. When you are home again, ploa?o give my kind inquiries to your people. b. I will do so. No. 4 Servant. If you please, Sir, Mr. Li has come to pay you a New Year call. a. Oh, ask him to come in, and show him into the library. b. A Happy New Year to you ! a. The same to you. b. Please take the seat of honour and I will make my New Year's salute to you. a. Oh, you are very good but let me take the will for the deed : sit down and drink some tea. b. After you. a. Is to-day the first day you have gone out ? b. No, I began going out yesterday. a. How many days calls shall you make ? b. Oh, I shall have finished them all in five or six days. a. And when do you mean to go into town ? b. On the 8th. I'AKT 11 THE <;ril)K TO KUAN-lll'A. 15 a. And when do you come back ? b. After the holidays. a. I suppose you haven't been to the Yauien at all since closing last year, b. Yes, I've been twice since then, to do one or two little things. a. You must be busy, I presume, as soon as you open again ? b. Yes indeed ! We don't have a moment's spare time then. a. No ; won't you have another cup of tea ? b. No more thank you, I must be going. a. Oh, there's no hurry, it is quite early yet. I). Well, but I have a good number of places to go to, and it wouldn't do to be late. a. Well then, thank you for your visit. When you get home, please give my compliments and wish them a Happy New Year. b. I will do so on my return. No. 5 a - 1 heard yesterday that you have been promoted to a Prel'ectship, and consequently I've come to-day to offer my con- gratulations. b. You are very kind, and I'm sure I am very much obliged to you. a. When are you likely to proceed to your new post ? b. I can't fix beforehand, because I have to wait for the Chiefs to send a deputy to take over my duties before I can hand over charge. a. And after handing over charge, do you then go to your new post, or must you first go to the provincial capital ? b. I go first to the capital. a. What year did you take your Degree ? b. I graduated in the year Hsin Yu. a. And when did you take your Doctor's degree ? b. In the Jen Hsii year. a. Really, you have carried all before you, most talented, upon my word. b. You flatter me ; it is merely a piece of temporary good luck, that's all. a. Oh, you are too modest. May I ask where you have held office ? 10* THE GUIDE TO K TAN-HI' A. PART II b. I was District Magistrate of Sliang Yiian Iisien for u period ; Afterwards, when my term was up, 1 had the honour to be recom- mended for promotion to my present post by the late Governor, but for some years, 1 am ashamed to say, I have rendered no service whatever. a. Oh, don't say that ! With such great talents no wonder that you are so fully appreciated in the higher circle*. What is more, it is very fortunate for the locality that you, who are like a father to the people, have now been promoted to be Prefect. b. You are quite too good ! a. Well, so soon as the day of your departure is fixed, I shall come again to bid you good-bye. b. Oh, I could not hear of such a thing. I am very much obliged to you now, and. I sliali come to your office shortly to return your call. a. Thank you, thank yon. No. 6 a. I hear there was a robbery committed by a number of men at the Bank at the East end of the street some nights ago ; is it true ? b. It wasn't a robbery, it was a fight. a. What about? b. Why, some common fellow had picked up a Bank Note and went to the Bank to cash it, but the Bank people said, " This is a lost Note, it has been advertised for already. Wait a bit and we will send for the person who lost it, and you two can settle it between yourselves personally ; he won't give you your trouble for nothing, he is sure to pay you some Taels reward.'' But the fellow wouldn't agree. "The Note's mine," he said, "and all I know is that I've brought the Note to be cashed ; what you say about somebody else having lost it is no business of mine, I'm not going to have anything to do with all that; just you give me the money and let's have no more about it." But the Bank wouldn't do it. Well, he was going to take back the Note itself, but they wouldn't give him that either, and detained it. So he goes away, and in the evening this fellow, with four others he had got, goes to the Bank to have a row. No sooner had they got there than they began to use bad language, got hold of one of the attendants at the counter, pulled him out and thrashed him, and knocked down the counting-boards lying on the counter. Well, just then the Police officials heard about it, and thinking it was a Bank robbery, they took their men, carried off these five fellows and sent them to the Magistracy. Afterwards, when they found it was a case of fighting they cangued all five of I'AKT II THE (1UIDE TO KUAN-HI A. 17 them on the East end of the street, and they arc to have half a month of it before they're set free. No. 7 What's that man sitting in the compound with the bundle want ? Servant. He sells cloisonne. a. Do you know him ? Servant. No, I don't know him. a. Then how do you know he sells cloisonne ? Servant. I was asking him just now, and he said he came from a cloisonne makers. a. Then is it cloisonne' that he has wrapped up in his bundle ? Servant. That's it, I expect. a. Well go and call him in. Servant. Come in, Mr. Manager. a. You sell cloisonne, do you ? b. Yes. a. And what cloisonne is it that you have in your bundle ? b. It's a pair of cloisonne vases. a. Open the bundle and let me have a look. b. There, Sir ! what do you think of that pair of vases ? a. Too large. Have you any rather smaller than that? b. We have in our place of business a smaller pair, models, not for sale, but you can have ones made of any size you want. a. I was merely asking, that's all. How many dollars would a pair like that be ? b. They would be over $100. a. Have you any small things ? b. What kind of small things do you mean ? a. Such as small pen-vases, seuling-oil cases, candlesticks, small knicknacks like thut. b. All the different articles you mention are now being made but they are not finished off yet. a. Well, how long will it be before they are? b. Another four or five days. a. Well, when they are finished, you might bring me several kinds, and the pair of vases you keep for models in your place, for me to look at, and if they suit me, I can order a pair of the same pattern. 18 THE GUIDE TO K I" AN -11 V A. TART II b. Yes, I will bring them in a few days. a. Where is your place of business ? b. In High Street, Hou Men. a. What name ? b. Kuang Ch'eng. a. Have you ever sold anything at this house before ? b. No, we never have. a. Well, this pair of vases is too large for my liking, you can take them away again. b. Yes ; excuse my leaving you, Sir. a. Good-day to you. No. 8 Is your master at home? Servant. Yes, Sir. a. Go in and tell your master that my name is Hsu, and I live at the Hou Men, and that I have something I wish to speak to him about. Servant. Yes, Sir My master begs you will step in to the library, Sir. b. How do you do, Sir ; glad to see you again. a. The pleasure is mutual ; and how have you been ? b. Quite well, thank you ; have you ? a. Yes, thank you very much. b. Have you been anywhere since we last met .' '/. Indeed I have ; I've been away for some time. b. Where did you go ? a. Beyond the Wall, to receive my rents. b. Ah ! a. I have called on you to-day, Sir, because I have something to consult you about. b. What is it ? a. A friend of mine, who lives to the west of the city, owns a few hundred acres, with an orchard and a vegetable garden, and having at present occasion for ready money, he has asked me to mortgage this land for him, and so I have come to ask you about it. If you care to take it on mortgage, I can arrange it for you. b. Is he at present farming the land himself or has he a tenant ? PAKT II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. ll a. Ho farms it himself. b. And how much does he want to raise on it ? a. A thousand taels. b. Then I'm afraid I couldn't find so much as that. a. How much could you manage ? b. Well I mif/Jit manage some five or six hundred taels. a. On that point let me go, back and speak to him, will you ? b. But now for how many years does he want to mortgage ? a. I was asking him about that, and he said there was no occasion to specify in writing the length of the mortgage in years, but the best way would be to provide that receipt of the money shall redeem the mortgage. b. There are objections to not stating the length of the term of years, because if in the course of the next few years I am given a provincial appointment, I shall require this sum, and consequently the length of the mortgage must be expressed. a. Ah, then I would see him about that. How long should you think it will probably be before you get a provincial appoint- ment ? b. I should think about five or six years. a. I fancy if I Consulted him about inserting five or six years he would be pretty certain to agree. b. Then there are the Title Deeds ; have you seen them ? a. I have. b. How many stamped Deeds are there and how many un- stamped ? a. Two stamped and two unstamped. b. Very well, will you go back and talk the matter over with him, and if he's willing to deal at that figure and also to say for five or six years in writing, we will settle the matter. a. When the matter has been finally arranged, you will want to go and look at the land ? b. Well it's this way : if you will agree to give first-rate security guaranteeing that the transaction is perfectly in order, why then I needn't view the land first. a. The transaction is perfectly in order, for that I can produce first-rate security. b. In that case then I will take your word for it, and after we have completed all the arrangements I will go to the place with him and have a look at it. 20 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II No. 9 Servant. If you please, Sir, Mr. Hsii, the Manager of the Ta Heng piece goods shop, has conie and says he wishes to see you on business. a. Go and ask him to come in ; show him into the drawing- room. Servant. Yes, Sir My master begs you will step into the drawing-room, Sir. a. Well, Mr. Hsii, how do you come to be disengaged like this ? b. I came to see if I could see yon and have a few words with you. a. Yes ; won't you sit down ? b. After you, Sir. You haven't been out, have you, Sir, these few days ? a. No I have not, because I haven't been very well. b. But you are all right now, I hope. a. Yes, quite. b. I came to borrow some money from you, Sir. a. How much do you want ? b. Not less than Tls. 500, it would have to be. a. Are you getting some more great bargains ? b. No, Sir, it is a shop that I am buying the goodwill of. a. What sort of shop ? b. A cash bank. a. How many frontages has it? b. Two. a. Whereabouts is it ? b. In the Chinese city hero, west end of Fa Pao Siiwt. . Whose was it before ? b. It belonged to a southern man before. a. Was it closed before the goodwill was sold, or how ? b. No, it isn't closed, but the proprietor is an Expectant District Magistrate who has lately been selected for a post, and as he must go off on service and has no brothers or relations to look after the business, he is obliged to sell the goodwill. a. And what did you pay for it ? b. The price was 1,000 taels. a. Does that include fittings as well ? b. Yes, fittings and all are included. PART II THE CfUIDE TO KUAN-11TA. 21 a. Have you paid over the amount ? b. Yes. a. Then what you want now is money for the business? b. Exactly. I have 500 taels in hand at present, but that's not enough for my requirements, and I must have 500 more. a. Ah ! well I will lend you 500 taels. b. I am very much obliged to you ; and you will name your own figure for what the rate of interest is to be. NOTE. Notice T*o*~c1Mng, written incorrectly here and in Xo. 24 TtJ-lixiainj. a. What are you talking of ? How can you mention such a thing as interest between such friends as ourselves because you require this small sum ; if you pay interest I won't lend it you ! b. Well, I will do as you wish. a. Thank you ; and what was the name of this shop ? /;. Its name was Te Ho. a. After taking it over, do you change the name? b. Yes. a. What do you mean to change it to ? b. I was going to make .it Su Ch'eng; what do you think of it? a. A very good one. Are you acquainted with cash-banking business ? b. No, I don't understand about it, but my nephew has loarnt cash-banking, and I mean to sot him up in this shop to carry on the business. a. Capital ! And when do you intend to start the concern ? b. Tt won't bo before early next month. n. When you do I shall come and offer my good wishes. b. You are too good ! But I must be going back. a. Why should you hurry ; sit down again for a while. b. No, I can't, for I've work to do in the shop. a. Well, I will send the money to your shop to-morrow evening. b. Yes, yes. a. Then you are off home now ? b. Yes, pray go indoors again. 22 THE GUIDE TO KI'AN-HT'A. PART (I No. 10 Servant. If you please, Sir, Lin, the carpenter, is here and would like to see you. a. Tell him to come in. Servant. Mr. Lin, my master bids you como in. I. Are you quite well. Sir ? . Quite well ; are you ? b. Quite well, thank you, Sir. a. How is it I haven't seen you at all for some timo? />. I've been home on a visit. . I farm something over a cJi'tng of land. . How many piculs of grain was your yield this year? b. A hundred piculs. a. Now that you've come back, have you undertaken any works ? b. Not yet. I came to see you to-day because there's a job I want to undertake, but I've no one to recommend me, and so I thought I would beg you to give me a recommendation. a. Where is the place' ? b. Why, you know Mr. Chiang, in the Western city, is going to build a house, and I should like to undertake the job. a. I've been told Mr. Chiang has had a number of people to look at it, but I don't know if anyone has decided to do the work. b. Quite right, Sir. I hear three men have been shown it; two of thorn wanted 8,000 tads, and one 7,500, which Mr. Chiang wasn't willing to give, so the matter is still open. a. Very well, if you take the contract, of course you must offer better terms than the others. b. Of course ; if I took the contract I would not only do the work several hundred taels cheaper, but the workmanship would certainly be substantial, no scamping whatever. a. Well, look here, I can easily mention you, but there's one thing, and that is, that I'm told Mr. Chiang's intention is, after he has finally decided, and signs the Agreement, to pay down half the amount at once, and to wait until the work is done before 1'AIJT II TI1K Gl 1DH To Kl AN-HUA. 23 giving the other half, now can you find that amount in the meantime ? b. Yes, I know half the sum will be received in the lir.-i in- stance, and I find on reckoning up that I can find the amount, because I've a friend who keeps a brickkiln, and IK; will willingly let me have bricks and tiles on credit till the works are finished. Besides that, my wife's younger brother keeps a timber-yard with a very large stock of timber which I may use as I like, also on credit. The half of the money, which I should receive, would only be to provide stone and lime and pay all the workmen's wages. I reckon I shan't be far out. a. Very good then, to-morrow I will go and see Mr. Chiang and tell him about you. b. If you will, Sir, I shall be very much obliged to you. When shall I come and hear from you, Sir? a. Come the day ufter to-morrow and hear my menage. b. Yes, Sir ; then I'll be going back now. a. Very good. No. 11 When did you come ? b. I came once before, and hearing yon weren't in I went oft somewhere else again, and when I came back just now, they told me you hadn't returned yet, so I just waited here until you did. * a. Then I've kept you waiting. b. Oh, don't mention it. Where is it you've been to? a. I've been out of the city to have a look at the crops on the country. b. The present crop is well forward, I suppose. a. Yes, it is. b. This autumn's harvest promises well then ? a. From what one can see at present, this year's harvest will certainly be a fine one. b. Did you watch the farm-labourers at work ? a. Yes ; when I went they were all hoeing away, but at noon they all went home for their midday meal, so I found a big tree, and took it easy under its shade for a while, watched the drovers and shepherds a bit, and then, when I had got cool enough, I strolled back home. b. Upon my word you know how to enjoy yourself. THE GUIDE TO KL'AN-HLTA. PART II . Enjoy myself ! It is simply this, that it's very dull sitting indoors, and if I take a siesta, I'm uncomfortable when 1 wake, so the best thing to do is to go out for a stroll. b. Quite a constitutional exercise, really ! a. Nonsense! Did you call to-day because yon had some- thing to speak to me about ? b. Yes, I did ; I'm in a difficulty and I want you to help me out of it. a. What is it ? b. Well it is this, my brother wants all of a sudden to set up a separate establishment. a. Why, have not you and your brother always been very good friends? What has made him suddenly take up this notion? b. I really don't know what the reason is. I think most likely he has been prompted to it by other people, or he wouldn't have wanted to set up for himself. a. Amongst us relations and friends it is impossible that anyone would cause an estrangement between you and your brother. b. Of course none of our relatives and friends could have urged him to set up for himself, but 1 know he has made some new friends lately, and not particularly desirable ones, and I think it must be they who have egged him on. a. Then how do you want me to act? b. I came because you have always got on well with my brother, and 1 thought I would ask you to bring him into your house one of these days and remonstrate with him, the thing is to succeed in preventing him. a. Oh, there would be no difficulty about getting him in and remonstrating with him, but the thing is this, although we have generally got on well together, unfortunately your brother has such a queer temper that I can't answer for his listening to me. What is to be done if he won't ? b. If he positively will not listen to advice, why there is no help for it, and he must have his own way and set up for himself. a. And supposing he insists on doing so, what division do you propose to make ? b. Well, our house-property consists of two dwelling-houses and two shop-premises. The Title Deeds of the dwelling-house in the. Western city, and the shop-premises in the Chinese city, are both held as securities elsewhere, but the Deeds of the house we are living in and of our shop, are not. I will give him these I'AUT U THE CJLJIDE TO KUAN-IIUA. 25 two properties, niul besides, he can take an ay what lie desires of the household effects and movables, i shan't make any objection whatever. (/. Well, that is exceedingly fair; none of your friends and relations can possibly have any criticism to pass upon you. No. 12 How is it I haven't seen you at all for some time? b. I went home for the harvest. a. And what sort of a harvest is it this year ? b. Well, pretty fair. . How much land do you farm ? b. Oh, I haven't much, just over one ch'iny. a. How many piculs of grain was your yield this year ? b. Over 100. . That's more than last year then. b. Yes, last year it was just 00, so the yield is over 40 piculs more this year. a. You were away a good long time, weren't you ? b. Why yes, two months and more. a. What, all that time at home ! b. I had a lawsuit, and I sold some land. . With whom did you have your suit ? b It was with a neighbour of ours. a. What was it about ? b. Well, I have some acres of lowlying land, which are under water every summer during the heavy rains, and so I haven't farmed them for the last few years, but just let them lie fallow. Now this land of mine abuts on the land of a man called Yii, and, as I said, r I haven't cultivated it for the last few years, and bit by bit several mou of it have been encroached on by him. Being always away, I didn't know of it until this time when I went back and heard from an old farm-hand of ours. Then I went to the place and looked for myself, and sure enough he had appropriated my land. Well, 1 went to see this man Yii, and asked him about the matter. He denied it altogether. So then I went to the Yamen and lodged a complaint against him, and when the Magistrate had gone into the case, he ordered him to restore me the land he had appropriated, and then I sold it. 26 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. TART II a. Ah ! Now do you keep the grain you get in every year for your own consumption, or do you sell it ? b. We don't keep it all, say some 30 or 40 piculs, the rest we sell. a. And where do you sell it? b. A few li from where we live there's a large market-town with a market every five days, and we load beasts with the grain and send it to be sold there. . And when it is at this place, do you sell it at a corn- dcaler's, or to individual buyers in the market ? b. To the latter as a rule. a. Do you sell it them yourself ? b. No, it is sold by the salesmen. a. Are they licensed by the Government ? b. Yes, they must all have a License given by Government before they can be salesmen. a. And the measures they use, are they all fixed by the Government too ? b. Yes, they are. a. Then where does the salesman's profit come from ? b. He gets his Salesman's Fee. a. Does the salesman fix the market-price ? b. Oh no. a. Who does ? /;. No one does. Speaking broadly it is like this : if on a particular day there is much grain brought, the market-rate naturally drops, if there's not much, it naturally rises. The thing is a matter of course, a market-rate isn't decided before- hand by anybody. a. Yes, I see now. No. 13 a. I came to ask you about something. b. What is it ? a. You have an orchard, haven't you, in the Western Hills ? b. Yes, I have one. a. What sized one is it ? b. Over 50 mou. a. Do you gather the fruit every year and sell it yourself, or do you make over the trees to some other person on contract ? PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 27 b. Some years ago I gathered and sold the fruit myself; the last few years I have made it over on contract. . To whom ? b. To a General Dealer's called Shim I, at Hai Tien. n. Well, the reason I came to see you to-day is that a friend of mine has opened a Dried Fruit Shop in the Western City, and he has several times asked me if I would arrange this matter of a Fruit contract for him, so knowing you had an orchard, I came to ask you. Should you be willing to make over the trees to him next year on a contract, I would bring you together. b. I have no objection to it if he wishes for one. a. He also told me to inquire as to what the conditions of the contract would be. b. Then your friend is not in the business ? a. You are right ; he has not been before. This is his first venture in that line. b. Well, the conditions of a Fruit contract are not many. When the fruit is ripe, I go with him to look at the orchard, and afterwards we come to an agreement as to the price of the contract, and after we have settled that, and the money is paid, the fruit for the year is his. a. And after the contract is concluded, there has to be a watcher, hasn't there ? b. Of course ; you must get a man to be in the orchard day and night watching. a. Do you and I get this watcber for him, or does he do that himself? b. Just as he likes ; if he asks us to get him, why we can ; if he prefers to get a man himself, there's no difficulty. a. Isn't the watcher likely to steal the fruit and sell it ? b. Well, it is like this ; in case it's a man that I get, I have to give a guarantee of course, and if there is any stealing and selling of fruit, then I am solely responsible. a. And the watcher is given his monthly wages and nothing else '! b. Just his wages. Only the contractor for the fruit has to buy the matting, planks, ropes, poles, etc. for putting up a matshed for him, but when the matshed is taken down he can take them all back again. a. Arid what ought to be done with any fruit that may drop from the tree ? 28 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-RUA. PART II b. Well, if it is not much and falls in the ordinary way, it is put on the ground, and the contractor is told of it any time that he goes there, but if by any chance there should happen to he a gale or a hailstorm, and the windfall should be very large, the watcher must at once go and inform the contractor, so that he can go and collect it. a. Yes ; well I will return and let my friend know all you have told me, and if he has any message I will come and see you again. b. Very good. NO. 14 a. Liu Ts'ai ! I. Sir ! a. The clock in the study won't go. Go presently t the Hsiang Sheng Watchmakers' shop, and ask Mr. Hsu, the Manager, to come round and repair it. b. Yes, Sir. b. Excuse my troubling you, gentlemen ! c. Ah, it's you, please to take a seat. b. My master has sent me to ask Mr. Hsii, the manager, to go to his place and repair a clock of his. c. Whose house are you in ? b. Mr. Fti's. c. Of Mien hua Lane ? b. That's it. r , May I ask your name ? b. Mine is Liu ; what is yours, please ? c. Hsii. b. Ah, you are Mr. Hsii, the manager, then ! I hope you will befriend me now and then. c. And the same with yourself. Is Mr. Clin still the butler at your place ? b. No, they have changed. c. Who have they taken on ? b. It's a Mr. Fan. c. How was that then ; did Mr. Ohn give up his place? b. That's it, he left. c. What was the reason of that? PART II THE flUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 29 b. On account of his health. c. Wliat was his complaint? I. Well, he never was strong, and then he smoked opium. This year he suddenly left it off, but before he had given it up altogether he fell ill, and got worse and worse every day until at last it became a downright consumption, and he wasn't able to do anything, so he left his situation and went home to try and get cured. c. Ah ! And can you tell me whether it is only to repair a clock, or are there watches to repair too. b. Master said, to mend a clock, but he didn't mention any watches to be repaired. All the same, if you take my advice, you'll take your watch-mending things along with you, there miffJit possibly be one to repair perhaps. c. Very well, then let us be going. b. Please to take a seat in the study, Mr. Manager, while I go in and tell Master. c. Certainly. a. How do you do Mr. Hsii ? c. Quite well, thank you ; and yon, Mr. Fu, how have you been ? a. Thank you, quite well. How is business ? c. Well, pretty fair, I'm much obliged to you. a. Are yon working at night now ? r. Yes, Sir, we are. a. And how many assistants have yon in your shop now ? c. Just at present, four. rr. And how many apprentices? c. Two apprentices. rt. All advanced enough to work at the table ? c. One is, but the others are new-comers and can't yet. a. And are you working every day in the shop ? r. No, I can't be working in the shop all the time ; mostly Tin out attending to business. a. What amount of money does the work you do at present every month represent ? c. Just now in a month, Well, it's about 400 tiaos worth or so. 30 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II a. More than 400 tiaos worth ! Why that's a good deal. c. Pretty fair, that is all ; but very different from what it used to be. . How much then used you to do in a month formerly ? c. In former days we did quite 700 tiaox worth. a. Really, so much as that ! c. Yes, at that time fully as much as that. a. Well, I sent for you to-day to have a look at this clock and see what is the reason it won't go. c. I will look and see. The chain is broken. a. It will have to be replaced by a new one then, won't it? c. No, there's no need for that ; I will take the chain away to the shop and rejoin it, and bring it back afterwards and put it in. a. Ah, that will be better. Will you have some tea ? c. After you, Sir. a. Tell me, in your business how many years are you learning? c. We are six years learning our business. a. Do you have to sign a written Agreement ? c. Yes, we do. a. And does an apprentice sign his Agreement as soon as ever he begins to work at the table ? c. No, Sir, he must be tried for a year first, and if he is a good apprentice, then he signs an Agreement. a. And after he has finished serving his apprenticeship, does he remain and practice his trade in the same shop, or does he then go elsewhere to do so ? c. He can do as he like about that ; if he wishes to remain working in the same shop, his wages are paid him at the same rate as an Assistant; if he doesn't, and wants to go elsewhere as an Assistant, he can. a. I see, yes. Oh, and have you bought me the Alarum I asked you to get me last time ? c. Yes. I made inquiries for you at all the shops in the city here, and there were none, but a man in our trade has gone to Tientsin lately, and I have asked him to try and find one at the Foreign stores there, and if there is one, I will bring it for you on his return. a. I'm really very much obliged to you. c. Not at all. And now I must be going back. Good-day to you, Sir. PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 31 a. You are oft' home again then ; niiieli obliged to you for your trouble in eoming. c. Thank you, thank you ! No, 15 . Have you conic from your house, Sir ? b. Yes. a. How is it I haven't seen you these last lew days ? b. I've been away shooting. a. With whom ? b. With a neighbour of ours. a. Where did you go to shoot ? b. To the Eastern Hills. a. When did you come back ? b. Last night. a. What sort of bag did you make ? b. We shot some pheasants and hares, and also a wild boar. a. Why then, you had good shooting this time. b. Yes, the shooting was good enough, but still we had a pretty hard time of it. a. In what way ? b. Well, we were each of us riding our own horse, and when we got to within a mile or two of the Eastern Hills, there was a market-town, so we found an inn in the place, where we put up. Next day, after we had finished our meal, we baited our two horses at the inn, and then shouldered our guns and strolled off to the hills. When we got there we only shot some pheasants and hares at first, but towards sundown a wild boar suddenly broke cover. We both fired and killed him. Where we were, there was nobody to be hired to carry the beast on a pole, so we dragged him back to the inn, and when we had reached it, we slung him on to one of the horses, and we ourselves took it in turns to ride the other. When we got home we were so tired we couldn't move. Pretty hard work, wasn't it .' a. Well, you had hard work, but still yon had some shooting. Now a connection of ours went out shooting some days ago, and not only shot nothing, but he lost his horse. b. How did he come to lose his horse, out shooting? a. Well, he told me he rode a horse to the Northern Hills to shoot, and tied it up to a tree at the foot of the hill, while he shouldered his gun and went up it in search of game. He searched for a long time but not a single thing could he see, so 32 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II down he came, and when he got to the bottom nnd looked, his horse was gone. Just then it suddenly began to snow, and he searched for a time, snowing as it was, all about the place, but it was nowhere to be seen. Well, by this time it had got dark, so he found a ruined temple, and there he made shift to spend the night. Next morning he felt very unwell, but there was no help for it, and he managed to get as far as the Yamen and reported the thing to the authorities. The official there asked him about the way he lost his horse, and then said, " I will send a man to make a thorough search for your horse, and if he has been stolen by any of the people of the place, he is sure to be found sooner or later ; but if he's been stolen by some passer-by, then he ivvn't be recovered ; meantime you had better go home." So he hired a donkey and came back, and after reaching home he grew worse and hasn't recovered yet. Wasn't that wretched luck ? No. 16 Haven't you heard that our friend Feng Tzii-yuan is dead I b. No I've not ; when did he die ? a. I was told this morning he died last night. b. Do you know from what illness ? a. I'm told it wasn't a natural death. b. How did it happen? a. It is said he took opium. b. What did he do that for ? a. The story I've heard is this. "A friend of his in the country came to Peking last year with several thousand taels, which he gave into his care, and then went home. Well; thi^ year he came up to town again and asked for this money, whereupon Tzii-yiian denied having got it. So the man went to the Yamen and entered a charge against him. When Tzii-yiian was summoned to the Yamen and interrogated, he denied the whole story, and said, " If I had kept his money, there must have been some evidence of it in writing ; now he has none whatever. It is an attempt to extort money from me on his part." The Magistrate then asked this man whether or no he had any written evidence. " No," he said, " we were on such good terms that none was drawn up at the time." " Well,'' said the Magistrate, " since there is no evidence in writing, merely your verbal statement, I can do nothing for you in the matter," and so the parties left the Court. The other man was so angry at this that he went home and, not very many days after, hanged himself. On the District Ma- gistrate coming to hold the inquest, they shook out from the dead man's leggings a Dying Declaration, which was an accusation of Tzu-yiian ; and when Tzu-yiian heard of the scandal this had caused, he got alarmed and took opium. PART II TIIK UTIDE TO Kl AN-IIUA. 33 b. What yon mention reminds mo that this Spring I heard vaguely of his having gone to law with some one; I suspect it was ahout tins. n. Probably it was (hat. />. Tlicro is something else, too which very likely you don't know of. IJel'oiv w;> \vcre acquainted with him he had already been guilty of a pive of rascality. a. What was i ha I. .' b. Why, you know he used to keep a cash-bank. a. Certainly, he did. b. During that time a friend of his, from one of the provinces, lived by hivS leave in these premises, where he afterwards was taken very ill, and before his death lie said to him, "In that box there are more than a thousand taels. You and I have been friends all this time, and I hope after my death you will send all my money and things back to my family for me." He promised to do so at the time. However, after the man's death, he changed his mind ahout it, and only sent back the man's effects to his family, but secreted these thousand and odd taels, and when the man's family afterwards wrote and asked him whether the de- ceased had left any money, he wrote back and said he had not. Later on he fell ill, and while he was at home nursing himself, one of his assistants in the shop bolted with several hundred taels, and on his recovery he closed his business. a. From whom did you hear that ? b. I heard it from an apprentice who had learnt his trade in his bank. ti. Well, having committed such a rascally thing as he had previously done, he should have reformed instead of committing another -one, and now he has brought his own death on himself. /;. But don't you know, all these unscrupulous people are generally like that: as soon as they see money, they immediately throw all thoughts of retribution to the winds. The fact is, that his death by taking opium simply serves him right. No. 17 << What did that man Ma come in just now to see you about.' b. He said he wanted to take something out of pawn, and asked me to lend him a few dozen tiao, and besides that he asked me if I could find him a placi^ in the service of some official. a. And did you promise to do so .' b. Yes, I did. I told him this,; I said, u I've no ready money by me just now ; wait until I go and borrow some for you, 34 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II and if I succeed in getting it, you take it, and if I can't, then you had better find some other means. With regard to getting you a place with an official, I will certainly recommend you as soon as one offers." a. If you will take my advice, you won't interest yourself for him about either of these things. b. What? . He certainly won't pay you back if you borrow money for him. b. How do you know that ? a. I know he won't repay you in the future money you lend him now, because before he hasn't paid other people money he has borrowed from them. b. He is hardly likely to i'ail to pay these few dozen li'.iu, 1 think. a. He wouldn't pay a few tiao, let alone a few dozen. And besides, he doesn't really borrow this money to take a thing out of pawn with. b. What is it 1'or then if it's not for that .' a. It's to gamble with. b. What, does he gamble ? a. He's very fond of it indeed, he is in gambling-houses all day long. b. Who are there at his home ? . His mother is dead long ago, but his father is still living. b. Has he no brothers and sisters ? a. He has no brothers older or younger than himself, he has one elder sister, who married long ago. b. Hasn't he married yet ? a. No, not yet. b. What age is his father? a. He must be over seventy now. b. What is he? a. He's a carpenter by trade. He used to keep a small timber yard, which he gave up afterwards ; now, he depends altogether on working for other people to make enough money to get along with. b. And this man himself, what can he do ? a. He cairt do anything whatever, except spend money. PART IT THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HFA. .l"> b. Has he learnt no trade then ? a. Ye*, he learnt for a time. b. What did he learn ? a. Ho was in a druggist's store learning the business, but after he had been there a month the manager discharged him. b. What for ? a. For being gluttonous and lazy, and for not keeping the rules of the establishment. b. Well, and afterwards did he do nothing else ? a. Yes, afterwards he went for a time into service with an official ? b. What official? a. Someone holding a provincial appointment some years ago, who came to Peking for Audience and stayed in a Club in the Chinese city, to whom he was recommended as a servant. This gentleman used to send him out every day to buy all sorts of curios and objects of art, and he made no end of money ; in two months lie had made a good many hundred taels. The gentleman found out this failing of his afterwards and dismissed him. Now, I suppose, these hundreds of taels are all spent, and so he comes to you to borrow money for him, but if you take my advice, you will neither borrow money nor find a place for him. If you do the one, he won't pay yon, and if you do the other, he will certainly do you no credit ; far better make up your mind to do nothing for him. b. Well, from what you say, he will come to grief when his father dies. a. I prophesied it of him long ago, that after his father's death he was certain to take to begging. b. Well, what reply am I to give him about these two applications of his to me ? a. Just tell him that you are not able to borrow the money, and that there's no situation to be had. b. Very well, I will speak to him as you say, and prevent him from expecting them. NO. 18 a. Li Ch'i ! b. Sir? a. Take this set of volumes to the Pao Wen T'ang, the booksellers in the Liu Li Ch'ang, and tell Mr. Yii, the manager, to have it fitted in boards ; and also give him this list, and tell 36 TITfi GUIDE TO KUAN-HT'A. PART II him to take one set of volumes of each of the works mentioned in it, and to give them you for the time to bring back for me to look at. b. Yes, Sir ; if you have nothing else for me I could go at once, then ? a. I've nothing else, you had better go now. b. Excuse my troubling yon. gentlemen; is Mr. Yi'i, the manager, in the shop ? c. Yes ; please come in and take a seat. b. Excuse me, Mr. Yii, for troubling you. (I. Ah ! Mr. Li, are you come from your place? b. Yes, I am. (L Have you come on business ? b. Why yes; my master told me to bring this set of volumes :nul get you to fit it in boards : and then, you sen this list hero, ! was to tell you to take one set of volumes from each of the works mentioned in it and give them me t<> take back for ihe time for him to look at. (I. Then I'll just put this set of volumes into hoards. We have two of the books in this list in tho shop; all the others 1 must go elsewhere to get. b. Very well, if you'll give me the two you have now in the shop lirst to take back and go and procure all the rest elsewhere, I will come back again here in a few days and fetch thorn, eh ? (1. There's no occasion, I think, for you to come here and fetch them; in a few days, if I can procure them, I will bring them myself to your place. b. Yes, that will be better still. d. Here are these two sets wrapped up for you. b. Well, I will say good-bye to you. d. Good-day. ***** b. Please, Sir, I gave Mr. Yii that set of volumes and told him to tit them in boards, and they've only got two of the hooks you wanted in the shop, and they have given mo two sets from them to bring back for yon to see, and the rest. Mr. Yii must go elsewhere for, and in a few days, if he can procure them, he will bring them himself, PART II TTTE OriDE TO KUAN-UFA. 37 a. Very good ; put those two sets in the bookshelves for the present. ''''. d. Excuse my troubling you, Mr. Li. h. Ah, Mr. Yii, have you just come into the city ? (/. Yes, I've just come in. /;. What are these books you've brought ? d. They are those books your master ordered to be got the other day, which I have got and brought hero. h. Master has gone to Tientsin. d. When did he go ? b. He started yesterday morning. d. Has he gone on duty ? b. No, on private business of his own. d. How many days will he be away? b. He'll have to bo ton days, including the journey thoro and bark. d. Then how about these books I've brought? />. Master left word to say you were to leave iho books here for the present, if you brought, them. d. Well, you see, hero are six sets of volumes. There were eig'ut books mentioned in the original list, you brought back two sets the other day, and to-day I've brought one set from each book, eight sets of books brought altogether, first and last. And bore is the list too which I should be obliged by your giving to your master; it has the cost of all these books Written on it. b. Yes ; and the set to be fitted in boards, have you finished thorn ? d. They are finished ; I forget to bring them with me to-day, I'll bring them some other day when I come again, eh ? b. Very well. d. When do you think I'd bettor come ? b. Well, I should think master won't come back boforo tho end of the month. I'll toll you what, when he's back, I'll come out of the city for you, eh ? d. Oh there is no occasion to put you to the trouble. At tho end of this month or tho beginning of noxt, -I shall bo. coining into the city on other business, and I can come here on my way and inquire. 38 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HT'A. PART II b. Yes, that would do. d. Then I will wish you good-day. b. Good-day to you. d. We shall meet again soon. No. 19 d. How is it you've been not at home every time I've come to see you ; what has kept you so busy ? b. I have been arranging a dispute. a. And what was the dispute you have been arranging ? Is it anything I may be told or not ? /;. Oh, there's nothing in it that mustn't be told. A friend of a relative of mine has been litigating with somebody, and my relative asked me to come forward and reconcile them. a. Some question of accounts ? b. No, about a purchase of some goods. d. How did that come to lead to litigation ! I. Well, it was this. My relative's friend is named Sheii, :md keep* a large Foreign Goods store in Pao Ting Fu called Hsin I. He came here this summer, and stayed at the Fu Sheng Inn, in the eastern suburbs, and ordered sixty bales of piece goods at the T'ai Ho Foreign Goods warehouse in Main Kast Street here. It was stated in writing in the Note of Contract of Sale that delivery of the goods was to be made in two months. When the time came last month, Mr. Shen went to T'ai Ho, and asked if the goods had arrived : " No," they said, " not yet." So Mr. Shen waited some days longer and then went and inquired again, still the goods had not come. Well, a few days ago Mr. Shen went to a warehouse in the west end of the suburb on other business, and there he heard that a dealer had lately bought sixty bales of piece goods from the T'ai Ho Firm through a broker called Wang, and that the price paid by this dealer was higher than the one agreed upon by himself, Shen, but that the money had not been paid yet, nor the goods taken delivery of. It struck Mr. Shen that these were no doubt the sixty bales he had bargained for, and that T'ai Ho now wanted to make a larger profit by reselling them to another man, and he was very angry indeed. So the other afternoon he want to T'ai Ho and asked them about it, and they denied that there was anything of the sort ; but afterwards, on his mentioning Wang, tlje broker, by name, they were obliged to admit it. But, they said, next month there were sixty more bales of piece goods coming, and they told him to wait for these. Mr. Shen wouldn't wait, he said he would have the sixty bales I'AKT II THE (il'IDE TO KUAN-11UA. 3D they had got now. T'ui Ho refused to give them him ; it' In; really could not wait for those oilier sixty bales, they said, the only course wns to return the original Deposit, burn the Note of Contract of Sale, and consider the whole transaction cancelled. No, Mr. Shen wouldn't agree. It wouldn't do to return the Deposit merely, they must also undertake to make good the profit made. But T'ai Ho positively refused to admit their liability to do this. So Mr. Shen drew up a formal charge, to which he appended the Note of Contract of Sale, and brought his case against the T'ai Ho Firm in the District Magistracy. The case came on before the Court the day before yesterday, mid the Magistrate, after hearing a general statement of their case from both parties, directed them to go out of Court and get someone, before going farther, to try and ell'oct tin arrange- ment. If none was possible, further pleas to be put in, and another hearing to be held. So my relative applied to me in assist him in corning forward and reconciling them, which we only finally managed to do yesterday evening. . And how ? b. We did it in this way ; we did make T'ai Ho give Mr. Shen the sixty bales actually in their hands first of all, and they are to tell the other dealer to wait till the other lot of sixty bales arrives next month, and he will be given those. Well, all parties have agreed to this. Yesterday evening delivery of the goods was made, the money was paid down, and to-morrow Mr. Shen: is to present a Declaration of Reconciliation at the District Magistrate's and terminate the matter. No. 20 ct. Have you come from the b. No, I'm just back from the T'ien Sheng Pawnbrokers', where, I've been making tenders. a. Have you dined ? b. Yes, I've had my dinner. a. If you've not, I can tell the cook to get you something to eat at once. b. No, really I've had dinner; I had it away from home with a friend of mine. a. Oh, very well. Were there many things tu-duy ut T'ieu Sheng's ? b. Not many curios and works of art, but a lot of clothing, and copper and tin ware. a. What did you tender for? b. For two watches, nothing else. 40 THE GUIDE TO. KUAN-HIT A. TAUT II a. I think tendering seldom pays, one nearly always loses. h. Well tluit depends on one's luck. If a lucky man goes and makes tenders, he is sure to come across great bargains ; when he tenders, the pawnbroker lets him have things dirt, cheap, so that he is able to make a heap of money. If an unlucky man makes a tender for a thing, he's let in at once, ihe pawnshop having been let in, when it was pledged, he is too, when he tenders for it, and not only doesn't make money, but actually loses a lot by it.' ((. It's perfectly true, what you say. Some years ago our shop made a number of tenders and lost money in every case, so now, no matter what pawnbrokers we are asked by, we never go and tender. l>. But I tell you, last year there was an instance of a man making a good thing by tendering. He was a distant connection of ours, and in the tenth moon last year he was invited to tender by the Heng kShun pawnbroker's in the Western City, lie bid for a copper watch, four taels, and the pawnbrokers sold it him. When he got home and examined it, blessed if it wasn't u gold watch, and he polished it up properly and sold it for more than forty taels, a thousand per cent profit. Now that was coming across a good bargain, and a paying one too. No. 21 Oh, I've just been to your hotel for you, but the assistants said you had gone to the west end, so I came to try and meet you on your way back, and I have done so by a lucky chance. How came you to go to the west end so early ? b. Why, a steamer came in this morning, and the people in our hotel had hired a wheel-barrow for a visitor, to carry his baggage ; the barrowman carried two boxes wrong, and the visitor was angry about it, so the shopmen, not knowing what to do, sent somebody to my house for me. I was just up, and when I heard of this I made haste and washed my face and went off to the hotel and saw the visitor, lie told me in reply to my question, that his name was Cli'cn, and he was a Fuhkien man, in the Kiangsu public service. He was now on his way to Peking. His steamer arrived this morning, and he came ashore and stopped at our hotel, where he told our people to hire two wheel-barrows for him. He ordered his servant to go with these to the steamer and bring off' his baggage, but when it was brought to the hotel, and he looked at it, two red leather trunks were missing, and besides this, amongst the luggage there were two white leather trunks, that weren't his, with the three words " Hsu Tzii-Ch'in '' written on them. Then he asked his two servants how it was that two boxes had been taken wrong. It 1'AllT II THE (JU1DE TO KUAN-HUA. 41 wasn't their fault, they said, they had both boon on board getting together the small odds and ends ; the two wheel-barrow men came on board themselves and removed the boxes, and that was why they had been taken wrong. So the visitor told our people to tell the wheel-barrow men to go at'onee and recover his two red leather trunks. They went and searched for some time, but couldn't find them, and as he was thoroughly angry, and insisted on getting his boxes, our people got rather bothered and sent off in a hurry for me. , a. And you have recovered your visitor's boxes ? b. Yes, I have now found this Mr. Hsil. Mr. Ch'en's two red leather trunks are with liim, and I'm now going back to the hotel to hire a wheel-barrow lirst to wheel off Mr. Hsu's two white trunks, and bring back the two red ones instead. a. How did you discover this Mr. Hsu? b. I inquired at all the hotels in our street first, and there being no such person there, I went westwards and asked at each hotel, one after another. When I reached the Yung Li they told me that a visitor of the name of Hsu had just arrived, so I went into his room, and asked him his style, which he told me was Tzu-ch'in. Then I told him about the luggage that had been mis-sent. "Oh," he said, "my luggage has jnst been brought, I haven't counted it over yet. Just let me go over it and make sure." When he had done so, he said, " Two of the trunks are wrong. Two white leather trunks of my own are missing, and there are two red ones too many." As what he said just corre- sponded, I said to him, " I'll send a wheel-barrow in a minute to bring your boxes, and you can give them these two red trunks to take back," and then [ came away. And what pressing business have you on hand, that you are hurrying oil for me so early? a. Why, we have rather a pressing call upon us to-day and want to apply to you to let us have temporary accommodation for a few hundred dollars. b. I can ; come with me to the hotel and fetch them. No. 22 Is it true, what I hear, that your relative Wang Tzu-clriiau has been denounced? b. Yes, it is. . Do you know on what charge ? b. Well, during last year 1 heard lie was going to be de- nounced, but without much believing it. Now, however, he has actually been denounced. A few days ago I saw Tzii-ch'tiau's eldest brother, and according to him, he has been disgraced on account of two cases, One of these was that, in the autumn of THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II the year before last there was a cash-bank robbery in the District City, and several hundred taels plunder were carried off, and not a single one of the thieve? was caught. Then the Governor denounced him, took away his button, and gave him so many months time to remain at his post, telling him to capture the thieves as quickly as possible. When the limit of time expired, he still hadn't caught a single thief. Well, they gave him several extensions of time, right up to last winter, but the gang were never caught at all. This spring, as luck would have it, a man in the District City went into someone's house in the middle of the night and murdered two persons, the murderer making his escape. So when there was this further case of "flight after after murder,'' the Governor denounced him to the Throne for dismissal. cf. Then he has already left his post? b. Yes, he is living in the provincial capital. a. What sort of a fortune has he made 1. b. Fortune ! he hasn'ta penny in the world. . Then why should he remain living in the provincial capital, if he's in such straitened circumstances ? b. Oh, he would like to come back, but he can't do so all al once. a. Why not? Can't find money for travelling expenses? b. No, it isn't that. After cashiering him, the Governor sent a Deputy to his Yamen, to examine the Treasury, and it was found that there was a deficit in his Land Tax receipts of over 1,000 taels. Wben the Deputy asked how he came to have such a deficit as that, he confessed tlin't he had misappropriated the money ; and so, on the Deputy's reporting this to the Governor, he sent and had the things in his residence sealed up, and trans- ferred Wang Tzii-ch'iian himself to the provincial capital, giving him two months time in which to refund the Amount of his deficit to Government on the Land Tax account, and if he didn't refund within the limit of time, he would apply for Imperial sanction to seize his house in Peking. So Wang, in his extremity, sent one of his domestics with a letter to Peking to see his brother, to tell him to find some way or other of raising 5,000 taels for him at once, and to give them to the man to bring back. His brother was in a great state on reading this letter, and came to me, and usked me to sell his shop-premises in the Chinese city, which I did at once, fortunately enough 1 must say, for 5,000 taels, and his brother gave the amount to the domestic, that had come, to take back. a. And how about the things in his residence, that were put under seal, it' he refunds this deficit in full 't PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 43 b. Oh, after ho lias refunded the money, of course his Chiefs will send some officer to his place to remove the seals, and give him back his things again ; SLndJhen he can come back. No. 23 a. Tell me, why has your friend Ch'ien Fa-ch'en's pawnshop commenced winding up its pawnbroking business ? b. He's about to close ; the business doesn't pay. a. Why, isn't it said that line of business is a capital one ? TTow Vomea it not to pay ? b. Ah, you judgv* by appearances only. When he first started pnwnbroking it wasn't with his own money only. He had a rela- tion in the public service, who lent him more than 10,000 taels to use free and without interest, he himself having only a few thousand, and with this he started. The business for some years was very good indeed, and his profits were pretty large. But the year before last his relation was appointed to a prefecture, , and wanted his 10,000 taels back. However, in spite of this money being withdrawn, his business might have struggled along, when he suddenly took a whim into his head to go into the opium trade. He began by only buying a chest or two for sale, on which he made a profit, as it so happened, and this encouraged him, and ho bought seven or eight chests more, and again sold them at a profit. The consequence was he grew bolder still, and jnst before the river closed last year, a hundred chests of drug arrived for a Cantonese dealer, and hearing there were no more steamers com- ing, he thought if he bought up these hundred chests, and kept them for sale during the winter, he must make a good thing of it. So off he went to this Cantonese dealer's and talked it over with the Manager, he wanting to take these hundred chests on two months' credit, and the Cantonese agreeing. Two or three days after his purchase another steamer suddenly came in, bringing five or six hundred chests of drug, and down went the market-price with a jump, so all he could do was to dispose of all his at once, at a loss of several thousand taels, which brought down his pawnbroking business too, in the crash. And the whole of his misfortune is the result of his giving up a safe business through this over-eagerness to get rich. a. Well, you know, the only people who never remain rich for long are those who go in for the opium business ; even if they make a fortune by it, it is only a short-lived pleasure ; naturally not many years pass before they are ruined. b. That's a matter of course. How can a man long enjoy wealth made in a trade which benefits himself by injuring others? a. In my native place there was a wholesale opium-house called Heng Yiian, which had a very large and widely-known 44 THE GUIDE TO KU AST-HIT A. PART II business. The proprietor, a man named Hao, used to go himself to Tientsin and buy drug from a Foreign hong, as much as several hundred chests at a time, and there must have been quite several dozen assistants in the shop. For several years he made a lot of money, had a house with ever so many buildings, and more than a hundred persons of all ranks in his household, and a large stud of horses and mules, and was a wealthy man of that sort. Last year he became absolutely beggared. At first I didn't understand how it came about so quickly, but. afterwards, on making particular inquiries, L found that ac- tually for several years, whilst his business was making money, the proprietor never went to the shop at all, but stayed at home n.ll ihe time enjoying himself, and for a long time he had not even struck a general balance of his books. livery day at dark the shop assistants used to secretly remove opium, he knowing nothing whatever about it. Last year, however, two friends of Hao, who knew that things were \vrong in his shop, told him to go there, and make up his accounts and take stock. So then he went, made up his accounts, and found a Debit Balance of many tens of thousands of taels. And besides, on taking stock, only a few chests of drug remained. When he asked the assistants how it was the books showed a Debit Balance, and the stock \vas short, they all said they didn't know. So he had nothing for it but to sell his house and his stud, and just managed to pay what he owed the Foreign Hong, and after that closed his shop. But from the vexation all this caused him, he fell ill and died; all his dependents left, and there only remained the members of his own family, and now they are in such poverty that if they get one meal they go without the next. So you see what comes of selling opium. No, 24 . When did you come back ? b. A short time ago. a. From Kiangsi, was it not ? /;. No, from Kiangsu. a. Didn't you go to Kiangsi originally; how is it you nre returning now from Kiangsu? b. I went to Kiangsi first, and then afterwards to Sooehow. a. And how have things gone with you since you've been away ? b. Capitally, for the few years I was in Kiangsi ; but after my arrival at Sooehow nothing has gone right. a. Why did you go to Sooehow, then, if you were so well off in Kiangsi ? PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 45 h. Why, uiy patron was appointed last year to a post in Yunnan, and proposed to invite me to accompany him, but I objected to the distance and was unwilling to go, and proposed to return to Peking. He dissuaded me from that, and said there was a chiijen of his year, a man named Ho, who was an Expectant Taotai at Soochow, and he wanted to give me an introduction to go there, and undertake the drafting of his official reports. I was willing enough, and so he despatched me with a letter of introduction from himself to Soochow. On reaching there I found this gentleman had two secretaries, both of them Chehkiang men, who, as soon as they found me there, imposed so much on my ignorance that I was obstructed in everything. When they began to talk in their own patois, I couldn't understand a single word; if by any chance I asked thorn any question, they would pretend not to know and wouldn't tell me. Even when out walking they used to leave me by myself. Finding their manner so extremely unsociable, I thought, "if we are to go on like that, why we shall have an open quarrel," so I threw up my engagement and came back. a. How did this gentleman, Mr. Ho, treat you ? b. Oh, he treated me well enough. But when I gave up mv engagement he asked me what my reason was for doing so, and sis I couldn't well mention that I didn't get on with my com- panions, I said I had a matter of importance in Peking which required me to return there for a time. However, he said he hoped when I had finished with it in Peking I would go back. a. Well, now you are back, do you mean to go away again or not ? b. Now that I'm back, my first intention was to be examined for an Official Writership, and supposing I passed, I should have liked to serve in Peking, and not go away, but on my arrival I found the examination was over, and now my idea is this, if there is anything suitable to be had I will go, if there is nothing that suits, then to remain in Peking for the present. a. Well, there is a place to be had away from Peking, I don't know whether you would accept it. b. What sort of place ? a. A very great friend of mine has lately been appointed to the Prefecture of T'ai Yuan in Shansi, vacated on promotion. Two days ago he asked me to engage some one as Despatch Writer for him. I have no one at present in my eye whom I can recommend, and now you have returned, if you care to accept it, I would give you the recommendation. b. What is this gentleman's name ? 46 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HFA. PART II a. His surname is Ch'ang, and Ch'un-fu is his style. b. A Ban nerman ? a. Yes, a Bannerman. b. What is he like? . What is it ? a. That man Chiang, whom I know very well, the other day conspired with some other people, and they swindled me out of a good many thousand tiao. b. Why, how did he succeed in swindling so much out of you ? a. He came to my house the other day, and said an acquaint- ance of his was now having a private gambling club at his house, and he invited me to go and play. So I went. When I got there and looked, I found seven or eight people there seated and playing. I didn't know one of them, and so he introduced me, and told me there were no strangers, and that he knew them all. So I sat down and began to play, and won a score or so of tiau, and then we broke up. Last night I had meant not to go, but as he insisted on my doing so, I couldn't help myself, and went again, and I then lost a good many hundred tiao. " Oh, it doesn't matter," he said to me, "go again a few times and you'll win several thousand tiao from them." Well, I believed what he said, and went with him again five or six times, and lost over 4, (100 tiao more, and they closed their club. Every day there were always two or three men coming to my house wanting the amount of my gambling debt. I went to see Chiang, but he was invisible and wouldn't see me. So I pawned two boxes of clothes to enable me to pay this debt. Yesterday a friend of mine told me that it was all a conspiracy against me, deliberately got up by Chiang with these other men. Most aggravating, is it not. /;. Certainly, it is detestable on Chiang's part. However, you yourself are to blame too, for if you had not gone with him to gamble he couldn't have swindled you. a. That's perfectly true. Still the man's nothing less than a brute, to be on good terms with me and yet help other people to cheat me. b. Speaking of conspiracies to defraud people, I'll tell you of a case. In my part of the world, one year, some of the bad PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 49 characters of the place opened a gambling saloon, simply with the intention of swindling people, and lots of people did get let in. Another thing was, that they wore a desperate set of blackguards, and so if anybody that lost money to them couldn't pay, he had lo settle accounts by giving them his house or land property. Well, where we lived there was a rich man, who was very clever, and very kind to the people about there too, and when he heard of this he was very angry. So one evening he drove in his own cart to the gambling house. When had gone in and found these fellows, he gave his name, and said he'd come on purpose to play ; and hearing this, and knowing him as a local magnate, they were all highly delighted. So they had a private consultation. 4k As this is his first visit,'' they said, "we'll let him win a few times to begin with, so that he will be willing to come again, and then one line day we'll make him lose to the tune of ten thousand lino or so, and we shall make our fortunes." Having made their plans they sat down and began playing, and sure enough he did win, and they paid up there and then. After this he went again twice and again won, and again they paid cash. Well, one evening he went again, and they played from watch- setting right on till close on daylight, and he had lost more than 10,000 tiao; so when it had got to be broad daylight he said to them, " I'll go home first and get the money ready for you, and at noon you can come to my house and get it," which they agreed to do. Back he went, and at midday two of them went to his house to get the money, and were announced by the servants. He called them into his library and asked them who they were and what they had come for. " Why," they said, "how is it you don't know us ? We have a gambling saloon at so-and-so. You've forgotten, but last night didn't you play at our place and lose over 10,000 tiao, and tell us to come for the money at this time? " Directly he heard this, the moneyed man said, in a rage, " Don't talk nonsense ! I, a man of property, play with rascals like you ! You must be out of your senses. If you want to do me, you've mistaken your man ; be off directly both of you, and think yourselves lucky, otherwise I'll send you both to the Yaincii and have you punished for extorting money ! " They were so frightened at hearing this, that they didn't dare bay a word, and made off as quick as they could. No, 27 ^ Why, what's made you look so deadly pale in the face ? b. I have been unwell for some days. a. How's that ? b. I interfered in another person's affairs, and 1 have rather given offence, aud it hat> brought on an attack of the uleeu. 50 THE GUIDE TO KUAJT-HUA. PART II a. In whose affairs was it, and how did you give offence ? b. Well, last month our friend Wen Tzii-shan commissioned ine to buy some land for him. I knew a man named Sun, living to the East of the city, who had a property of over a cltiny that he wanted to sell, and so I took him to see Wen Tzu-shan. Litter on they both went to the East of the city, and viewed the land, and afterwards asked my good offices in arranging the price for them. A thousand taels was df-ided on, and agreed to on both sides, and three days ago was fixed for the Agreement to be signed and the money to be paid over. Well, three days ago Sun and I went to Wen Tzu-shan's, but when we got there, he hadn't got up, and we waited for him some time in his study till he did. When he saw us, he said he couldn't buy that land, and when we asked him why not, he said he had been raising money for some time, but the amount was short of a thousand taels. We asked him how much he had raised, and he told us 950 taels. "Very well," said Sun, when he heard this, "let ifc be 950 taels then ! " and accordingly the Agreement was signed and the money was paid. He put me in a very disagree- able position with Sun, for if he really and truly hadn't been able to raise this fifty taels there would be some excuse for him, but with means like his, he can put his hand on fifty thousand laels, let alone fifty. I hate him. He deliberately takes advan- tage of a man and puts me into the false position with him. So when I got home again that day, the more I thought over it the more angry I felt, and owing to this my old complaint came back and I fell ill. a. Well, do you know Wen Tzu-shan's younger brother is worse than he is. He was once my partner in business, and with all the stock that was sold by him, when it came to the division , of profits, he always paid me my share short by two or three strings of cash, knowing I shouldn't like to ask him for them, but he used always to say, "Oh, this time I owe you two or three tiao ; in a day or two I'll make it up to you in some way." However, he never mentioned it again, and after a good long time 1 used to forget too, and then 1 thought no more about the matter. By this meanness 1 must have lost several hundred iiau in a few years. Then again, if you take the way he treats his friends, and the terms he is on with his relatives, he absolutely understands nothing about it. It is always "Take care of Number One ; " that's the sort of fellow he is ! Last year there, was a death in his family, and he begged me over and over again to ask two friends to help him at home by sitting up all night with him. So I asked two very good friends of mine, who sat up with him five or six nights, and did all they possibly could for him. And when it was all over he never uveii went and thanked PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 51 them for all their trouble, and one day afterwards meeting one of them in the street, he bent his head down and passed on. The fact is, he is quite unprincipled. Such a disposition as his is too hateful you know ! And I've heard recently he's doing still worse. He is lending money at high rates ; whoever borrows money from him pays S per cent per month. He's become notorious for his exorbitant rates of interest. I knew how it would be long ago. lie's a rich man, but it won't bo long before bo's mined. The ancients said, and it's a certain truth, " Til- gotten gains don't prosper long." No. 28 . So I hear your brother has returned. How is it I haven't seen him out ? b. He has been ill since he came back. a. How's that ? Did he get fever on the journey ? /;. Well no, not fever, but a shock. a. What sort of a shock? b. He met pirates when on board his boat. ii. Tell me how it was ? /;. He was on his boat in company with a friend. There was one servant and one boat. One evening, while the boat was anchored at a place, some ten or more pirates came on board from the shore, armed with torches, swords, and spears, and came into the cabin, after cutting open the boarding. They presented their swords at my brother and asked him, " What have you got ? " " Oh," said my brother, " our things are all lying about in this cabin ; there's nothing anywhere else." So the gang took the boxes, bundles and cash, and went off with them, leaving them the bedding. Luckily, my brother had a money-belt on, in which there were some ten ounces of gold or more, and they also saved a few dozen taels. At daylight they went to a landing- place, and my brother and his friend, after talking it over, thought of disembarking and travelling by land. His friend being quite willing, they removed their bedding, and at the landing-place they hired two carts, and came on by land. When he got home he felt ill, and the doctor whom he called in said he had received a shock which was accompanied by a touch of the prevailing sickness. He is taking medicine now, but he's not well. No. 29 n. Your speaking of your brother's encounter with pirates on his journey, reminds me of an incident I'll tell you about. My father's elder brother, now dead, was once going with a friend to Kansuh. They hired two carts and took two servants, each going in one cart, and so they started. One day they came to a 52 THE GUIDE T6 KUAN-UFA. PART II place where their carters didn't know the road, and they missed their way. They went on until it was nearly dark, but not a town could they find. They were all in a great state of mind, but there was nothing to be done, and so they wandered blindly on. They travell- d along till close upon the watch-setting, and then they reached a large wood, from the further side of which a little gleam of lamp-light was visible. So their two carts made for this light, and on coming close up they saw it was an inn. Out- side there were two meal-sellers' sign -boards hanging ; the inn- door was shut, and looking out on the street was a window with a lighted lamp inside. Well, they called out to open the door, and drove in. When they got inside and looked round, the plaee was quito lonely and deserted, without a single visitor. So they selected three rooms and brought in their luggage, and then told the people of the inn to get some water for washing, make tea,' and get some food ready. My uncle saw the inn-people were such a dubious-looking set that his suspicions were rather aroused. When they had finished their meal, and while his friend was on the k'ang arranging the baggage, in came one of the inn-servants to make some tea. My uncle noticed that all the time he kept on looking at the baggage on the k f ang, and, seeing this sort of thing, ny uncle's doubts increased. However, he didn't like to say anything for fear of alarming his friend. After drinking his tea he went to the back yard to relieve himself. When he got there, he saw three rooms, one was a w.-c. and the other two were rooms for stacking provender. After my uncle had entered the w.-c. and while he was relieving himself, he hoard two men come from the front court, push open the door of the room with the provender, and go in to get some fodder. He then heard one say to the other, " What did the Master arrange with you when he called you away just now?" Then he heard tho other man say, " It was arranged like this : at dead of night, you and I are to go and kill the two carters, and they three will go and kill the two visitors. I have agreed with the Master that after the job is done, the two carts shall be given us for our share, one cart apiece, and that never mind how much money the two visitors have got, that's to be no eoncern of ours at all. What I mean to do is this : when you and I hare got hold of our share, early to-morrow we'll give up our business here, and go back home, one of us in each cart. After this we'll both reform and not do any mischief to people any more. What do you think of that?" The other man said, ' You're right, that's a first-rate plan." When they had finished talking, he heard them go off to the front side. " Well," said my uncle to himself, " no wonder I thought the inn-people such a rascally-looking lot. No doubt about it, this is a flash * inn." Well, after this he PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 53 came out of the w.-c., went to his own room, and told his friend all he'd heard. His friend on hearing this was terribly frightened. So while they were both in their room in great trouble, and not knowing what to do, they suddenly heard a large number of carts coming along, until there was a knocking at the gate, and when that was opened, they saw six Government Treasure carts enter, with two visitors and four Treasure Escort men. ''There's no fear MOW;," said my uncle, " we can go to sleep directly in security." And then they sent one of their servants across and asked the Treasure carts, and were told the latter were going to start next morning at the fifth watch. My uncle's party slept till the fifth watch, then rose, told their carters to put to the carts, and went off* in company with the Treasure carts. In that way they jnst managed to avoid this great danger. A narrow escape, wasn't it? No. 30 ". T say, I'll tell you a story. In our village there lives a man who is pretty well off, and who has always been very stingy. He has never helped anyone, nor given any money in charity. Well, some days ago a married younger sister of his came to his house, in spite of the rain, and said that her husband had now got employment as accountant on board a sea-going ship, which had put to sea two days ago, and that now, having nothing to eat in the house, she had come through the rain to try and borrow a picul of rice and a few taels until her husband's return, when they should be paid back without fail. When the man had heard this, he told his sister he had no rice and no money, and he couldn't possibly provide her with them, and said she must go and borrow elsewhere. So the sister, finding he wouldn't do anything, broke out crying, and he seeing- her do so went off out of her way in the siriks. Now there was a neighbour of his living in the same compound, a cheery sort of fellow, who was very angry at hearing that he wouldn't do anything for his sifter, and so he asked her in, lent her a picul of rice and several taels besides, and hired a donkey for her into the bargain, and then sent her back. When the man returned and heard from his people of his neighbour lending his sister rice and money to take back with her, not a word of any kind did he say, but pretended not to know. Now that night, as it happened, a thief came, who bored a hole in the back wall of the house, got into his room and stole some dozens of taels and some clothes from him. Next morning, when he found there had been a robbery and he had lost things, being afraid that his sister, when she heard of his losing his money and clothes, would be sure to exult over it and come to ask about it, instead of going to the Yamen and giving notice of the robbery in his house, he even asked his neighbour, living in the same compound, not to tell people he had been robbed. But T)4 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HPA. PART II do you know, the same night this thief had stolen his things, as luck would have it, \vheii he reached the main street he got arrested by the night-patrol and sent to the Yamen. The official asked the fellow from whose house the money and clothes were stolen, and he then confessed they were stolen from so-and-so's house in such-and-such a village. Thereupon the official sent a runner to tell the person concerned to receive hack the stolen property. When this man heard this he was much disturbed, for it wouldn't do not to go and receive his things from the Yumen, while if he did go he was afraid of his sister hearing of it. So he thought of a way by which he asked this neighbour of bis to assume his name and go and receive his property at the Yaini-n for him. His friend agreed, and went instead : but he despised the man for his former refusal to help his sister and determined to pay him out. So after receiving over the money and the clothes from the Yamen, he sent them all to the sister, and on reaching the house and seeing him, he told him a lie, and said, "After coming from the Yamen just now, when I got into the the street I came right on your sister. She asked me where 1 had been to, and I said I had been to the Yamen to receive your money and clothes for you. Then she told me to give them to her, arid as she is your own sister I couldn't well refuse to, and so I did give them to her." The man, on hearing this, not only didn't venture to get angry but he had, on the contrary, to express his thanks. And now everybody who hears about it says it was a smart thing and done by a smart man. No. 31 #. Speakine of that miserly fellow meeting with his deserts, I'll tell you anmher story. One year when I was lodging at an inn in the South, there was a Shansi merchant stopping in the same house. One day there suddenly appeared a poor fellow, also a Shansi man, who was all in rags, and who wanted to see this merchant. The inn-servants showed him in, and when he saw the merchant he said, " I've wandered to this place. I can't go home because I've no money for the journey, and am iu the greatest, distress. Yesterday a fellow-countryman of ours told m<> you had come here on business, and were staying at this inn. I was very glad to hear it, and so I've come to see you and to beg you, for the sake of Auld Lang Syne, to lend me a hundred taels to pay my expenses to get home. When I get there I will find some means of repaying you." "Oh," the other man replied, "I've already laid out all my money in stock ; just now I haven't got a single tael in hand. Think of some other plan, for really I can't give you any help." The poor man, when he heard him say he couldn't give any help, wept, and the merchant then went into an inner room and sat down. Now there happened to be a Ssu-chuan PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 55 man slaying in (lie same inn who went to the room to have a chut, with this merchant, ami seeing this poor man sitting in a chair weeping, he asked him for what reason he was iu such grief. The man replied: "This merchant used to he a near neighbour of urine in my native place. In years gone by, while he was poor, I have often helped him with money and food : afterwards too 1 lent him money to start in business, and now he lias grown rich. I have lost money in my business in this part of I lie country and have none to pay for my journey home. 1 come to him to borrow a hundred taels in order to go back, and lie refuses to lend \t me. That is why I am in such deep grief.'' When the Ssii-chuan man had heard to the end of the story, he went into the inner room and asked the merchant, " This story of your fellow-countryman's, that he has given you help in former years, is it true?" "Yes," said the merchant, "it's true enough. Unfortunately I have no money at present to lend hirn." " Well," said the Ssu-chuan man, " supposing, for instance, I lent you a hundred taels, which you gave him for travelling-expenses home, and you repaid me in a month from this, giving me an l.O.U. no interest charged either, would you be willing or not?" Well, he was obliged to say he was willing, whereupon the Ssii- chuan man brought a hundred taels from his own room to lend him, and made him give it to the poor man to take away with him, got the merchant to write him an I.O.U., which he kept, and after a day or two the Ssu-chuan man moved from the house also. After a few more days the merchant opened his box and >u\v at once that a hundred taels were missing, and the l.O.U. was lying there. Then he discovered that the Ssii chuan man was a conjuror and knew the art of spiriting things away ; that he had spirited away his hundred taels, and given them to the poor man to take with him. Some time afterwards one of the merchant's servants let out the story, and everybody said, who heard it, that it served him quite right. No. 32 " I hear your brother has been engaged iu a lawsuit ; is it ti ue ? b. Yes, quite true. a. With whom ? b. With a rascal living in our town. . And what about ? b. It happened like this. One day my brother went pigeon- shooting in a wood to the north of the town. Well, he fired, and without his knowing it, there happened tu be someone standing outside the wood, who was leading a horse. All of a 56 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II sudden the horse, bearing the report of the gun, was siurtled and bolted away. The man, in bis annoyanee, caught hold of my brother, and told him to make good the value of the horse. "Don't get excited," said my brother, "which way did the beast gallop ? " " North-west," said the man. " What colon r is he ? " " Chestnut," said the man. " Well," said my brother, " this business is easily managed. I'll go at onee with y. 01, it's ratlin amusing, what you mention. Yesterday, before sending them the cotton, we got out a hundred tally-sticks, and afterwards gave one tally to each man that carried a bale. When we had sent the whole of the hundred bales, and a good long while after, Mr. Wang, the Manager of the Yung Fa Godown, sent a man to our godown to ask why we sent them a bale short. We told him, " We have sent a hundred bales of cotton ; what do you mean by * sending a bale short ' ? " The man said they had received in their godown ninety-nine bales one bale short. I was very much surprised at hearing this, and so I went with the man to their place. As soon as Mr. Wang saw me, he seemed annoyed and said, " Y^our godown-men are really too careless ! How is it they've sent us a bale of cotton short? " I asked him, " How do you know they have? " " Oh," he said, " when the cotton had all been delivered, the tally-keeper had ninety-nine tallies, isn't that one bale short ? " Then I asked them, " Which of you was it just now in the godown that took the tallies?" One of the assistants standing by said he had. I asked him, " When you were taking the tallies just now, didn't you go anywhere else ? " l - No," he said, " I didn't go anywhere, except that I had a sudden stomachache and I went to the w.-c. to relieve myself for a short time." So 1 said to him, " First of all, let you and me go and have a look in the w.-c." When we went there together and looked, there was a tally lying on the ground. I picked it up and took it along with me to Mr. Wang. " Now then," 1 said, " whose are the careless godown-men now ? Your assistant drops a tally in the w.-c. and then you say we have sent you a bale short ! It's true it is of no great importance, but still you can't deny you have been a good deal too hasty." This made him look very sheepish, and he didn't utter a single word. Then 1 went on, " Although we have found the tally, let us go through the goods again all the same, and see if they arc short or not, and then we shall both be more satisfied." So 1 told their assistants to pass the bales from the godown into the yard, and counted them up carefully, and right enough there were one hundred bales. " Well," I said, " you see plainly there's no mistake." " Y r es," they replied, they saw it was all right, and so I came back, llather amusing. Wasn't it ? 58 THE GUIDE T6 KUAN-HUA. PART II a. I told you once before, this Mr. Wang is a stupid fellow, though you didn't quite believe me. The idea of his simply taking the tallies and without checking the goods, saying you hud sent him a bale short ! /;. Well, do you know, this is what happened last year. We bought a hundred taels worth' of goods from their godown, and gave them a bank-note i'or that sum. Two days afterwards he brought back the note and said it was forged. 1 looked at the note, and it had no mark showing it was forged, so 1 asked him, 41 If it's a forgery, why has , it no mark to show it?" lie said it had none because he hadn't gone to the House concerned. ''How do you know then it is a forgery it' you haven't been to the House itself?" I asked him. " Oh," he said, " their account- ant thought it looked like a forged note." At such a wild remark as this I said, " We'll take the note together and get it cashed ul the bank, and see whether it's forged or not." So we wen! , and actually it wasn't a forgery at all, and we cashed it. He couldn't hide his embarrassment, and took away the money, looking very much confused. NO, 34 . Mr. Manager, I've got a bad note here that I have brought back to you. b. Let me have a look at it. This isn't one of ours. a. Why not? b. Because it hasn't got our endorsement on it. a. But indeed it was got from you, I remember. Why do you say now it wasn't ? b. I'll tell you. If it was a note coming from us, it would certainly have our endorsement, and our chop. As this had got neither the one nor the other, why it can't be ours. it. You say it hasn't your endorsement, but this note of mine ha* an endorsement as being received from you. />. It isn't enough merely to have your endorsement as being received from us ; it requires to have our endorsement showing the person we received it from. a. Oh, well! if it has your endorsement, and you won't acknowledge it, why I'm helpless. b. There's no reason why we shouldn't acknowledge it. If it had been got from us, we should return it back to the other person, we should lose nothing, so why shouldn't we recognize it ? a. But it's possible you may have forgotten to endorse this note. b. That's out of the question ! We couldn't forget to do so, Besides there's another reason, which I'll tell you. This note is PART II THE fJUTDE TO KUAN-HUA. 59 issued by one of the * sly " banks, and we have never used the notes of these " sly " hanks in our shop, so we are still more certain it didn't come from us. n. Well, if you insist on saying it didn't come from you, why then I can't help myself, and I must grin and bear it, that's all. /;. I should advise yon to take it back, and think it over again from whom you got it. a. Will you change this \0-tfno note for me into five l-tiao notes and one 5 -1*00? /;. We haven't got Jiny of our own notes for 1 tino. Will it do if we change it for the notes of another house .' n. Yes, that will do. /;. Just count them and see that they're right. a. Quite right ! Have these all got your endorsement ? b. Yes, all. No. 35 n. I say, I've just seen a bit of an excitement in tho market- town. b. What was it? a. A Southern man had got hold of one of the natives and was going to the Sub-District Deputy Magistrate's Yamen with him to have him up, and a whole lot of people were following, so not knowing what it was about, I went with them to the Yamen to see what it all meant. Then I saw the pair of them reach the Yamen, and the Southerner told the Yamen-runners, that they two had a case to settle, whereupon they took them in. I went in too, and saw the Deputy Magistrate take his seat in Court, and both of them eame up before him and knelt down. The Magistrate first questioned the Southern man. " What's your name? Where do yon como from? What is it you have como to have decided ? " Then the Southern man made a kotow and said, "My name is Yii-p'ei; I come from Lin-Chiang-fu in Kiangsi, and I keep a ready-made clothes shop in this place. Last year I bought a concubine, so I rented a two-roomed dwelling-house in Teng-Lung Lane, in the market-town here. Just now I was at work in my shop, and sent an apprentice to fetch something from my house. When he came back he said there was a young man sitting in my house, but he didn't know who he was. This made me feel very suspicious, and I hurried home to see. When I got there I saw the street-door was closed. I pushed it open, went into the room and looked, and saw this man sitting there drinking tea, talking and laughing with my concubine. Then I asked him, " Who are you and what have 00 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II come to my house for? " He answered that lie had come there as a knocking-shop. I was very angry indeed on hearing that, and gave him a slap in the face, and in return he scratched mine, so then I dragged him here for the case to be heard. Please Your Honour to ask him what he really did go to my house for." Then the Deputy Magistrate asked the other man, u What's your name? Where do yon live? What are you? and ^yhy did you go to Yii-p'ei's house?" The man answered, "My name is AVang An : I live in Hung Chu Lane in this town : my usual business is making short loans of money. Yii-p'ei's concubine used to live in the same compound as 1 did. Two months ago she borrowed from me ten taels at interest, and every month I !<> 1<> her house to get the interest on it. To-day the date had come round again, and I took my stamp and went to her house. The concubine asked me to step inside and have some tea, and I went in. She gave me the interest, and after that she made tea in the tea-pot. While I was sitting there, drinking my tea, \ 7 u-p'ei came back. When he saw me he glowered all over, and with his eyes staring at me he asked me, " Who are you ? and what have yon come to my house for ? " When I heard him speak so rudely to me, why I did get angry and said 1 came to his house as a knocking-s.hop. At that ho slapped me in the face, and I was provoked and scratched his face back. Then he dragged me here to have the case heard." When he had finished, he took out a folded parcel of interest- money, and showed it to the Magistrate. Then the Magistrate said, "As Yii-p'ei doesn't like your going to his house, after this you must go every month to his shop for the interest on your loan. You are forbidden to go again to his house. If you do, and Yii-p'ei comes and informs against yon. I shall certainly punish you for it," and with that ho told them both to go back again. No. 36 n. I say, I've got something to tell you. h. What's that ? a. I came back from the country a short time ago. One day, when I was stopping at an inn in A large market-town, I heard the landlord say, that some days before a man had gone with a bangle to sell to a cash-bank in the town, called the Te Ch'eng Bank. Well, the people iu the shop had just fetched a pair of scales to weigh the bangle, when another man came in, who said to the one who was selling the bangle, " I've just been to } out- house to take you a Letter of Advice. Your servants said you had gone into the street, so I went to try and find you, and I happened to see you come in here." As he was speaking, he palled out from his breast a letter and a packet of silver, and said, PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-TUTA. fit * This is a Letter of Advice from Chehkiang." The man wlio was selling the bangle took the Letter of Advice, gave the man who brought it a hundred cash, and he went away. The man with the bangle then said to the people of the shop, " My brother lias sent me some money from Chehkiang, so I won't sell the bangle. Shall I sell you the silver? There's another thing, I'm no scholar, would you open the letter and read it out to me? " So they gave him the bangle again, opened the letter and read it out to him. It began by simply saying that things were going- on well there, and that his brother was not to be anxious ; then it continued, " I'm sending you ten taels now, which please use, and when there's another opportunity 1 will send you a further remittance." The man then said, kl Will you take the silver away and weigh it, and change it for me into cash ?" The bank- people did take it away and weigh it, and found there were eleven taels. They were delighted at this, and thought they would do him out of a tael, so they changed it into cash as ten taels, and gave it to him, and oft" he went with it. After a little while another man came in with a note to cash, who said to them, " You've been done ; the man who sold you the silver just now is a swindler. It's bad silver, what he sold you. How did you come to let him cheat you ? " As soon as they heard this they at once got the sycee-shears and cut open the silver, and saw at a glance the silver was bad, sure enough. 80 the bank-people asked the man, "I)o you know the swindler's house?" He replied, " I will take you to see him, if yon will pay me for it." Well, the manager gave the man a ttao, and told him to take them to see this other man. The fellow took the tiao, and went oft' with the two men from the bank. When they had reached the door of a con- fectioner's shop, he said to the two men. " Look, there's the swindler, eating pastry inside the shop. Go in and see him for yourselves." So in went the two with the bad packet of silver, and when they found him they said, " This packet you sold us is bad silver." " Well," he said, " / didn't know whether it was bad or not ; it was brought me, you know, from my brother in the provinces. As it's bad I'll give you back the cash." There- upon he asked the manager of the confectioner's shop to see whether the silver weighed ten taels or not. When the manager had taken the silver and put it in tho balance scales and weighed it, he said, i{ This is eleven taels.'* On hearing this the man said to the two men from the bank, " What I just sold you was ten taels ; this packet is eleven ; how can it be mine ? You have brought some other bad silver and want to cheat me ! M The two men from the bank made no reply, and some other people who were there eating refreshments were so indignant at hearing this, that they all wanted to lay hands on the men from the bank, who had nothing for it but to fi2 TTTE GUIDE TO lUIAff-HUA. PART II take the packet of bad silver as quick as they could and run away back. NO. 37 Your story of the swindler reminds me of a thing I will tell yon about. Some years ago, in my part of the country, there used to live a celebrated doctor named Fang. Pie possessed a title and had a small fortune of his own, and used to receive several dozens of patients every forenoon. One morning a man came to him, who seemed by his dress to be a servant in some large establishment. On seeing Dr. Fang he paid, " I belong to such-and-such a house. My master and mistress are both ill, and wish to come and consult you ; and they Avould be glad if you will be at home to-morrow morning," which Dr. Fang said he would be. Next morning the same servant again appeared, accompanied by another man carrying a bundle in his hand. The servant entered and said to Dr. Fang, " I beg your pardon, Sir: Master first, or Mistress first ?" "Your mistress first, of course," Dr. Fang answered. The servant then took the bundle from the other man's hand, and went out with it, while the latter sat down on a seat and waited. After the consultations were over and all the people gone, Dr. Fang asked the man, " Have you come to consult me?" "No," he said, "I come from a second-hand clothes shop; I'm only waiting here for your servant to bring me out the clothes." This surprised Dr. Fang very much, so he asked, " What servant of mine? What clothes have you brought?" ""Why," the man replied, "the servant that came in along with me just now, didn't you tell him the Mistress was to see first, and then he took the clothes inside r " " What did that man tell you ?" asked Dr. Fang again, " that he was my servant ? And what piece of clothing did you bring anyhow ? " The shopman said, " This morning that man came to our shop, and said he was your servant, arid that you wanted to buy a lady's fur-cloak, and that we were to bring one for you to look at, and if it suited you would keep it. He told one of us to come with him, so I came."' " Now, look here," said Dr. Fang, " t-bat man is no servant of mine, and I don't know who he is. lie came here yesterday and said he belonged to the so-and-so's, that his master and mistress were ill and wished to come and consult me, and told me to remain at home for them this morning. When he came in just now and asked me, ' Master first, or Mistress first? ' I thought his master and mistress had come, and that's why I said, * Your mistress first, of course.' I meant I would see his mistress first. I know nothing whatever about any clothes. You be quick and go and try and find him." When he had heard this, the man from the second-hand clothes shop understood that the other fellow was a swindler and had made off with the clothes. i TAUT 11 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-11UA. 63 No. 38 a. Huo Fu ! b. Yes, Sir ! a. Go and ask the teacher to come to IIP-. b. The teacher has come, Sir; he is sitting in the outer room. a. (to c). Ah ! have you rested yourself, Sir ? c. Yes, 1 have ; I hope you have too. r. Well, I don't foul very tired. There's something I want to consult you about. c. What is that ? a. It's ahout the diary 1 kept while we were on our trip; it wants putting in order ; and to find someone to copy it out. c. Well, if you will get me out the rough draft, J will look over it first, a. And there's one thing in it I have forgotten ; I wish you would think of it for me. c. What is it? a. It was when we were having breakfast in the inn at San Ho Chen, I heard one of the visitors say that some man stopping at a temple somewhere had hanged himself, which got the priest of the temple into trouble, and also that there had been some legal proceedings ; but I don't recollect exactly how it all was. Do you remember ? c. Ah ! Yes, I remember that. a. Then tell it me again please. c. The visitor who was breakfasting said that there was a temple where he lived called the Shui Hsien Miao, in which a man was stopping who hanged himself one night. Next day, as soon as it was light, the priest gave notiee to the authorities, and the District Magistrate with his examiners held an inquest. The examiners, without making a thorough inspection, said the man seemed to have been strangled. On this the magistrate took the priest to his Yamen and asked him why he had strangled his visitor. The priest answered, " I have neither any old grudge or recent grievance with the man; how could I have strangled him?" The magistrate, not believing this, applied corporal punishment to make him confess, but it wat; all in vain, he would not confess, so the magistrate then imprisoned him. Now the priest had a novice, who was so disturbed by this that he went to the provincial capital and laid a charge at the Governor's Yameu, whereupon the Governor deputed the magistrate of the adjoining district, and he took skilled examiners with him and held a second inquest at the temple, when it turned out that the duad man had 64 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II died by hanging. The magistrate of the adjoining district having finished an accurate report of the facts to the governor, then degraded the magistrate who held the original inquiry, and punished the examiners who made the original inspection, and released the priest. That was the story. a. Yes, you're quite right ; that was it. 1 wish you would insert it in the diary, what do you say ? c. Yes, certainly. When 1 have put it in proper order, who is to transcribe it? a. T was going to engage someone to copy it. c. If it is transcribed there would probably be sonic clerical errors in it. a. Then what had I better do ? <. Well, if you're not in a hurry, I should think I might transcribe it when I have time. a. Oh, if you would take the trouble, 1 should be very much obliged indeed. c. No trouble at all. No. 39 a. It is dull drinking our wine and doing nothing, as \ve are doing to-day. Why shouldn't we fill up and play a lew rounds at morra ? b. All right. Let you and I have a round first. a. Why, that will be giving away the game to me for nothing, won't it ? b. Don't begin boasting yet. It's not certain who wins and who loses, you know. a. Here you are. Four seasons making money. b. Sixes ! a. Quits ! b. Five golden prizemen. a. Look ! how's that ? b. Oh, you're losing. This time yon only won by a peri'e-d, fluke. a. Drink your wine first, and we'll compare notes afterwards. b. I've drunk it already. a. When ? I didn't see it. b. Ask the others whether I've drunk it or not. '. Gentlemen, did you sec him drink / 1'AKT II THE GUIDE TO KUAN-I1UA. 65 c. We didn't notice. a. The others haven't seen you ; it is evident you're shirking it. 13e quick and drink. I). I've drunk already ; 1 can't 'drink again. ". I f you don't, we'll all pour it down your throat. />. This is awful ! Well now, look here, 1 can't stand much liquor, let my forfeit be a funny story. a. Yes, that will do ; and if you don't tell a good one, you'll still have to pay the forfeit. /). Well, listen ; it is really a good one. a. Out with it then. b. The story is against the Censorate, so it's a good thing there are no Censors in the company. a. Just you tell your story. There's no one here who won't take your side. b. Well, listen. There was once a countryman who was very poor and quite without means. So after turning the matter over in his inind, he thought he would go to Peking and be a eunuch, and have a fine position and make plenty of money. So he went to .Peking and entered himself as a pupil under an Imperial eunuch. a. But wait a bit. Your story needs explanation. There would be no difficulty, of course, even for such a raw countryman, in coming to Peking and going straight into the Palace, would there ? b. Well, I'm going to tell you. He got someone to introduce him. a. Well, why didn't you tell us that clearly at first ? b. Don't be so excessively critical, and let me go on at once. a. Go on, What happened next ? b. Well, having got the eunuch to be his tutor, he begged him to instruct him in all matters and look after him. So the eunuch sent him into the Imperial Palace as a domestic servant. One day His Majesty's orders were given that refreshments were to be served, so the countryman said, " The Everlasting Lord wants luncheon ! " The eunuch cried out at him with, ** Don't speak in that stupid way ! You must say, * The Everlasting Lord desires to be served with imperial Refreshments.'" So he made a note of this in his mind. One day commands were given for a grand Court banquet, and the countryman again said, " The Everlasting Lord wishes to give a dinner-party." Again the eunuch scolded him: "You've used the wrong words; you ought 10 66 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART It to have said, * The Everlasting Lord desires to give an Imperial banquet.' In future recollect well. For example, the Palace Gardens are called the ' Imperial Gardens ; ' the soldiers of the escort are called the ' Imperial Guard.' " The countryman heard this, and all of a sudden it all flashed upon him, and he said to himself, " Why, of course ! You put on the word ' Imperial ' to everything that's in sight of the Emperor. I understand it now. From this time I shall be an old hand at it." One day, as he was passing the gate of the Palace Gardens, he trod in a lump of excrement, which made him very angry, and he was just going to swear when he thought, " I suppose it's been left by His Majesty," whereupon he pointed with his finger at the lump and said, " If I didn't think you were an Imperial Privy Counsellor, 1 would give you a good cursing and no mistake ! " a. It's lucky there are none of those gentlemen umong the company, or your mouth would have been swollen with twisting by this time. b. Well, my mouth isn't twisted. Now you should tell us something. a. My joke is against District Police Masters. b. That's fun. We must all listen. a. It's called the Ten Orders of a District Police Master. b. Let's hear what you call the Ten Orders. a. Listen. He is addressed with honour for one whole lifetime : he has two pieces of bamboo borne before him : he receives three times ten taels of salary : he summons the ti-paos of four quarters : he inflicts jive blows on the face : he sends circulars to the six directions : he depends on the District Officers of the seventh rank : he builds a figure of eight shaped wall : he tacks on his uniform a badge of the ninth rank : and he doesn't get his ten shares of enjoyment. b. Good. The other nine sentences are all right, but the last one is too bad. a. If there were u District Police Master here to-day, wouldn't you just have to make your peace with him ! No. 4:0 a. Have you kept at home this, last day or two for the New Year, and not gone out at all ? b. I go out every evening. a. Then why don't you come to uie here .' PART II THE fJT'TPE TO KUAN-HFA. 07 b. The last few days I and some friends of mine have been guessing riddles in the evening at the entrance of the Ts'un Ku Chai curio-shop. a. Who set them ? h. They were set by a chiijen. a. Were they well written ? b. Not bad at all. a. Did you succeed in guessing any ? b. Yes, I took off some. 1 a. What were they ? b. One that I guessed was, " The character yen (word) without the top dot: four passages from the Four Books." a. Tell me, what were the passages ? b. One was, " What words are those? "; one was, " Without giving it the dot ; " another was, " The last words were but in jest ; " and the other, " How true these words ! " 2 a. That was a hard one to guess. b. I guessed another, which was three passages to be solved by a single word. a. Tell me, what were they ? b. Listen : " Tzii-lu paid, ' It is that,' Yen-hui said, < It is like that,' Confucius said, 'It is not that; in ibat lies a right line.'" The word mieh (Q) solves it. 3 And another of four sentences to be solved by one word : " With ten its mouth is filled, but say not it isjtel. Too bad of you, really. How could you use their shop- phrases ? I've no doubt he would never hang that pair of Xew Year Scrolls. a. No, of course he wouldn't hang them up. " Verv well,' 1 he said, "I can't hang these up, but J shall keep them because they are quite in our line, and hereafter they will be an heirloom." b. Don't you talk such nonsense ! Put on your things and let's go for a bit of a stroll. a. Wait a moment while I change my things, and Til go with you. Nnti'st to No. Id. 1 The slip of paper on which a riddle is written is attached to tho lighted lantern, which thus renders it legible in the surrounding dnrUno>>. Whon guessed, the riddle is removed from tho bintorn. '-' This and the following ncrogtioa require in English translation the word-piny must ho I thi- first are respectively. 3frnrinx, Cli. 2. Part 1 ih'nl.. l'h. 0, Part 1 ; and 'iJtiil., Oh. 7, Part I. -I ha ;ire in the original classical text, except flic se xplanation, especially as alvts, Oh. H, Part 1 : e translated them as they md, which has hore hccii purposely changed by the substitution of 3Jj tn/. (not) for the " ?/?/ (T) of the Analects. The clue being the character "g* yen (=word or words), maimed by the absence of the top dot, the first passage is made to read, 'What 'word' is that?" q.d. thus imperfectly written the character is not yen (word) at all. The meaning of the second passage, as properly written, is, " I hold with Tien/' the latter being a man's name. But a forced application is given by a double pun and the use of a different sense for the second character. Thus icn (I) is changed to wu (not), yii takes the sense of giving, in place of that of holding or agreeing with, and by a second pun tien has its ordinary rendering of a dot or stroke, instead of being used as a proper name. The third and fourth passages require no explanation beyond this, that in both " words " must be changed to " word." I think this is quite enough elucidation for an acrostic of which the character of the point turns on the point of a character. PART II THE nriDE TO KFAN-HUA. f>9 :l This riddle hinges on the likeness in form between the characters "Oil i/i'fi and "\i Mich., :ind involves also the use of the former as a final particle in the written language. Thus, the three speakers may be supposed to say either " It is so, or that," etc., or " It is .(the word) //''//." etc. The pMfl&ge translated " In tliat lies the right line" (J@[ ^j_t J ^p) is from the Analects, Ch. 7, Part 1. In the Classic, CONFUCIUS refers to the right line of conduct to be followed by a ion in the embarrassing, indeed |i;i infnl. position, where his parent having permitted himself an indul- gence in the uncertain joys of sheepstealing, the son afterwards becomes cognizant of the fact. But here, the "right line" is a physical not a moral one, being the vertical middle downstroke which distinguishes "till >n'-h from T^ ni'nb. 1 The character fjfc yii (fish), thus solves this riddle. The numeral "* sit lit (ten) within [J k'on (mouth), forms the character (fl t'-'n-n (lield). t\v<> strokes above and f(ur dots below which, convert it into yii (tish) while they are also the upper and lower parts, or the head nnd tail, of the character ^ icit (nought or not). 3 He is mentioned in the Analects, Ch. 6, Part 1. "The course of history " corresponds to jfi .//?'//, meaning both history or a historian ; " passing the Dragon Gate " corresponds to ffi( yii (fish), standing hero for the li i/il or carp, which, according to an old saying, is transformed into a Dragon after passing the Dragon Gate, for which see MAYERS' Mnnnal, p. 2S2. The phrase is used of successful graduation for degrees. Ta 7/i/yi, Section 10. 7 AndU'cts, Ch. 4, Part 1. Tzil-lu is the name of one of CONFUCIUS' disciples, but the two words are very neatly applied in this case to solve tho riddle by taking t~u In as "the moves of the pieces " which pn tui " do not correspond," namely in the two games of chess and wci-clri. * Pn kan-cJihif) has not only the meaning of physical uncleanliness. but of that more dreaded infection caused by the presence of " the spirit that walks in shadow." It is worth noting that the syllables s7t.it I and kitri are considered to rhyme, though in the orthography of Sir T. WADE this is disguised by a slight difference of spelling. " u 1 have the honour," etc., and " Who is with great truth," etc. These formal expressions best convoy the spirit of the equally formal and official phrases in the text. 70 THE GUIDE TO Kl'AX-TTT'A. PAT1T TTT PART III. NO. 1 a. Who's there? I. It is mo ? n. Come in. b. I've brought the lad yon told me to find for yon the other day. Sir. If you've time jnst now I'll bring him in for yon to sco, and if yon like him yon can keep him. a. Of course, yes. b. This gentleman is Mr, Cheng; make your duty to him. a. Where does he come from, and what's his name ; how old is he, and what's his place in the family ? c. I am a Shantung man ; my name is Chang ; I am eighteen years old and the eldest son. b. He has been many years in Peking ; he doesn't speak like an outsider. He used to be a neighbour of ours and very sharp, but he has never been a servant before, so he must be trained by d ogre OR. a. That is all right. I've only recently come hove and haven't yet engaged anvbody; and I don't quite know whether it's necessary to have a guarantee or not. b. That's as you wish, Sir. a. Very well, let it be this way then, as he comos on your recommendation, will you be guarantee? b. Yes, I will. And from when shall he begin to attend on you, Sir? a. H ? m. To-day is the 28th : two days more to the end of the month. Oh, the best way will be just to tell him to come on the 1st of next month. b. Yes. a. And there's his bedding and so on, tell him to bring that with him too. b. Yes, Sir : and wo must fix on a room for him to live in. a. Well, I think that empty room facing south, and next the bath-room, on the west, behind the white wall right at the end of the court, would do for him, wouldn't it ? PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 71 b. To bo sure, that would be a capital place. I). Mr. C. has sent a man with a note for you, Sir. '/. Oh! Mr. C. asks me to sec him. I'll go now .it once. Then let the mutter be settled in that way. No. 2 u. Boy ! b. Yes, Sir! a. Make sonic tea for the teacher. b. What tea do you want, Sir, coffee or black tea ? a. Neither, make some Japanese tea. b. There's no more tea left, Sir, in the pewter canister. a. Very well, you know the tin canister on the second shelf of the cupboard in the inner room, well take that; and after this, whenever you see the tea in the canister is coming to an end, even if I don't tell you, just replenish it. b. Yes, Sir. a. Make haste and get the tea, I'll make it myself. a. Ask the teacher to have whichever cup of tea he likes best. And yesterday you never looked what you were about, and put in ever so much tea. It was made so strong that it was altogether too bitter to drink. Didn't you see what faces Master Wu kept pulling when he was drinking it yesterday ? b. Yes, another time I will take more care when I'm making the tea. a. And the teapot, and cups and saucers, that are in the tray on the tea-poy, bring them all here, and then see whether there's any fire in the chafing-dish. b. Yes,- Sir. It's nearly out. a. Then look sharp and bring some boiling water, and while you're about it bring some live charcoal with you. b. What do you calP'live charcoal," Sir ? a. Oh, what a fool you are ! Don't you even know what u live charcoal " is / Well, I'll tell you : charcoal that hasn't been lighted is "fresh charcoal," and red-hot charcoal is "live charcoal." b. Yes, Sir. Here's the hot water ; will you make tea, Sir ? a. H'm, this spittoon is quite full. Take it away and rinse it out and then bring it back. b. Yes, Sir ! Tt THE GUIDE TO KUAtf-HUA. PART. Ill NO. 3 a. Who's there ? b. It's getting late, Sir ; get up at once. a. H'm. Get some water for washing. b. The water for washing is brought, the water for your teeth is poured out, and the soap-dish is on the washhuud-r-tuml. a. Where's the tooth-powder? b. It's in the drawer of the table, with the tooth-brush. a. Bring a towel. b. Yes, Sir. a. What are you in such a hurry for ? You needn't wash the floor yet ; do that when you've folded up the bedding. You'll have to change the pillow-eases and sheets to-day. b. Yes, Sir. Will you have breakfast now, (Sir ? a. H'm, well yes, bring it. I don't want the eggs boiled so hard as they were yesterday ; the softer the better. b. Yes, Sir. Will you have hot buttered toast to-day ? a. No ; and look here, don't burn it. b. Yes, Sir. a. There's no spoon, nor salt-cellar. b. Here they are, Sir ! Have you enough white sugar? a. Yes ! Ah, this egg is boiled just right. a. Oh, there's a thing I want to ask you about, I'm told the milk sold here in Peking is always more than half water. Is that so ? b. Perhaps it may be so with the milk bought by ordinary households, but they wouldn't dare to adulterate what we use in this establishment. a. In buying milk here, do you buy it by the catty or by the bottle? /;. l>y the bottle or by the bowl. As a rule the price is not less than nine pal a bottle, and two pai u bowl. Any more coffee, Sir ? a. No, take away. I'm going to Mr. C's rooms. If anybody wants to see ine, let me know. b. Yes, Sir. No. 4 " Sir, your boy has come to say your dinner is ready, and will you go and have it. b. All right, I'm coming. *'*#..,.# a. Here ! e. Yes, Sir i PART HI THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 73 b. You ask me to come to dinner ; then why have you dawdled so and not served it .' What have yon been about? c. Why, the coalman has just sent the coal-balls, and I weighed them, and then the bill he had made out was wrong, and J went over the memo, slip to see how many times he had sent. That's what made me late in getting dinner on the table. b. Very well. And how much are the coal-balls a picul ? r. Four tiao and more a picul. /;. Well, now get dinner. c. Yes, Sir. h. Tell the cook the chicken-broth he made for tiffin yesterday was bad. Toll him to be more careful in skimming off all the grease when he makes it to-morrow. Cg Yes, Sir. b. Give me a helping. c. Yes, Sir. b. This isn't my rice-bowl ; it is your young master's. c. Ah, I've brought the wrong one ; I'll change it for your's, Sir. b. Never mind about changing it. There's still a very neces- sary thing wanting, just think a bit. c. Yes, yes, Sir ; knives, forks, spoons, cruet-stand, plates, dishes, chop-sticks, are all there, I really can't think of anything still wanting. Please to remind me, Sir. l>. No wine-glasses ! c. Why, of course ! I clean forgot them. b. What is this? c. It's broth made of taros and chicken. b. This is just to rny taste. I think the cook must have put in some Japanese Fish sauce. 1 f. Yes, Sir, I think very likely. b. This is very gojd beet, (uvc MIC r.oni' 1 mustard and salt. c. Yes, Sir. /'. Now then ! Look here, you've knocked over this bowl with your sleeve ; get a duster at once and wipe it. f. Yes, Sir. 1 This is tlu 1 term for sonic fish the Japanese mime of winch the author told me, but I have unfortunately mislaid it. II 74 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HLA. PART 111 b. You're always in such a hurry-scurry in what you do. Just look how you have made this brand-new table-cloth all over dirty stains. c. Please to overlook it, Sir, for after this 1 will really be careful about things. I. Give me some salt vegetables. c. There's no pickled cabbage to-day. I've got some soured beancurd and some pickled encumber. There zV soy in the cucumber already. Shall I add some more vinegar .' b. No, I've finished now; take away everything. c. Toothpicks, Sir ! b. H'rn. Bring the tea, and go and have your dinner. No. 5 . To-day is the 9th ; aren't you going to the Lung Fu Ssii, Sir? b. H'm. I have asked Mr. Wu to go with me. Go and ask if Master Cheng is in or not. . I saw them just now go out ; most likely he isn't in. b. Very well, get out my clothes. a. Which clothes do you want ? />. European. a. Will you wear the woollen cloth ones or the linen ones ? b. Well, it is rather cool to-day, so get out the black cloth coat and that pair of striped grey linen trousers. a. Look, Sir, it is this waistcoat and shirt you want, isn't it ? b. Oh, I can't bear this set of studs, get those crystal ones instead. How limp this collar has been starched ! Besides, the dirt on it hasn't been washed oft'; and it has been ironed down the wrong way. When the washerman comes to-morrow, just tell him he must take more care in his washing, and he must use more washing-powder in starching. And when he\s spirting the water over a thing, tell him to take an iron and iron it thoroughly, :*o as to do the thing properly. Take ont that pair of half-shoes. a. Yes, Sir. b. These uoeka rather want mending , tell the maid tu ;jtt d piece of patching and put it in. a. Yes, Sir. b. Don't go away yet ; stay and help me to dress. Where do you want to go ? a. To get a cart for you, Sir. 'AHT HI TIIK ,riPK TO Kl'AN-lll A. 7."> h. No need for that ; it's not far ; I can walk, a. It looks better to drive. h. Well, there's plenty of time to get one when I're finished dressing. a. Yes, Sir. h. Give me the shoe-liorn, and pull the bottom of my trowsers down ; and bring me a handkerchief, and the gold watch. {. Do yon want your cigar-case, Sir? b. Yes; and fokl up the Japanese clothes I've taken off, and mind you brush them. a. Yes. One moment, Sir, there's a bit creased here that wants pulling out. /;. Is it smoothed out now ? a. Quite smooth, Sir. b. Well, I shall go and sit in Mr. Blank's room until you'vo got a cart. a. Yes, $ir. No. 6 Please, Sir, the cart's here. b. Tell him to go first to Legation Street, and from there to the Liu LL Ch'ang. I want to buy some curios. a. Yes, Sir ; if you are going to be there some time, Sir, I think it would be best to hire it for the single journey. b. No, there and back ; it will save all further bother. Is the cart you've engaged clean ? Is the body of it large or small ? And is the mule a good one ? a. All very good ; this one to-day isn't a cart from a stand. b. Then it's a cart that will go anywhere, eh ? a. No, not one of those either; it's a private cart. b. A private cart ! Then how can it ply for hire ? a. Well, their master has no employment just now, so for fear the beast should get troublesome from want of work, he has told the carter to put it to, and take it out for a day's hire. If you don't believe me, Sir, you can see in a minute. It isn't only that the mule is so fat, and that the cover and cushions of the cart are suited to the weather and the time of year, but there are curtains too. b. Oh ! Then no doubt it's a very good one. But there's another thing ; if the driver is a raw hand, when he gets to the stone road at the Ch'ien Men, he's sure to drive into all the ruts 76 TTTE ftUmE TO KT'AN-HrA. PATIT TIT and make ono. giddy and dizzy by tho bumping, even the baek- side of the person in the cart gets swollen by the jolting. . Oh, this one here is a clever driver ; he will never do like that. />. What's the charge ? a. I've settled with him for six tiao ; that includes the money for his food too. If it's very late when you've driven back, why you could give him a little extra for something to drink. Do you want me to go with you, Sir ? b. H'm. Well, yes ; you can ride on the shafts and come with me. a. Yes, Sir. b. Put in that coloured rug first, and spread it out. And haven't yon got two official hats? V. That's true; I've heard Chinese gentlemen say Dr. Yung Chi's treatment and medicines are wonderfully effective. a. The only thing is though, that Chinese who are friends of hi? are always asking him to go and seo their cases, so that he's not often at home, and I'm afraid this time yours will be a fruitless errand. />. It's a good thing that yonr illness is not serious, Sir. Supposing ho's not at home, shall I ask ^ome other doctor to see yon, Sir .' a. In that case, yes, you might call in a Chinese doctor. b. Our doctors all follow the native practice of medicine, which is not the same as the foreign methods of treatment. Wouldn't it be better to ask Dr. Dudgeon, of the Shih I Yuan, to attend you, Sir? a. Well, yes, it would be as well. b. If you please, Sir, just the very thing, Dr. Yung Chi has called to see you. a. Well, that is fortunate ; a^k him in at once, and get some wine and refreshments ready. h. What wine shall I open, Sir 1 . Yes, Sir. " You have the corkscrew lockel up, haven't you, Sir? a. Yes ; it's on the top shelf of the cupboard, with the screwdriver. Get some tea. b. Yes, Sir. a. Pour out some wine. /;. Yes, Sir. a. Bring some cigais. a. Show this gentleman out for me. 7S THE Gl'IDE TO KI'AN-HI'A. PART 111 1). Yes, Sir. The Doctor has gone ; he told me to tell you that the powder was to be taken in three doses, and you were to be sure to take it just before sleeping ; and he said, too, that you were to avoid eating anything cold and uncooked. a. Why didn't he tell me that just now ? b. I suppose he only just thought of it. a. Well, in the evening serve it up to m<\ I. Yes, Sir. Will you take some gruel now, Sir? a. I 'ring it in if it's ready, and bring me some pears too. I. But didn't the doctor tell you to avoid eating cold and uncooked things ? a. H'm ; well, I won't have them then. b. No, Sir. No. 8 " In a day or two I want to go to the Nankou Pass, and on my way back, round by the Western Hills, so as to visit any pretty scenery in the neighbourhood, and then come home. Would you like to come with me ? b. Of course I would, Sir. If you were to go through fire and water, I would go with you, Sir. a. Have you ever been there before ? b. Yes, I went once last year with another gentleman. Do you mean to go in a chair or to ride, Sir ? a. Oh, anyway will do for me; but I'm going to take your Mistress, so tell me beforehand all the different articles we shall need. b. Well, as Mistress is going too, there's no doubt wr> must take some extra things. Because you see, Sir, from the time we will leave here, and as soon as we stop at an inn, there is one thing you wouldn't think of, Sir, and that will be wanted, for it is very important for Mistress, because if she were to want to relieve nature, I'm afraid there would be no convenient place for her. a. Then how shall we manage ? b. Our own women always take their own close-stools when they travel, so we must take the same thing too this time ; or else take along a very long and broad piece of cloth, besides getting four bamboo poles ; then after we get into the inn, and have settled down, we can put up a screened-off place as a w.-c. That might be done. a. Oh, now I shouldn't wonder if there were some other inconvenience of the kind, eh ? PAUT III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 79 b. Well, Sir, I'll tell you ; not to speak of having to take bedding and other articles, we must carry with us some extra stores for Mistress' food too. And supposing you want to go and bathe at T'ang Shan, you will have to spend several more days, and of course you will want still more things for the time you stay there. a. Well then, to-morrow first engage a chair, and a mule, and then carefully think over what food we must take, get it all ready and pack it in a hamper, for convenience of carrying it. b. Yes, Sir ; you need not give yourself any trouble about taking the things, as you've got 'me. As soon as the traps and the provisions are all put up properly, I will hire a cart, and put them all in it, and then I can look after the things and ride at the same time very nicely. No. 9 Oh ! I have had such a job ! But to-day at last I've managed to rent a house. It used to be a small temple; the rooms are beautifully clean, and the rent isn't high. /;. Where is it ; and how many rooms are there ? a. Outside the Ch'i-hua Men, west of the temple of the Sun. I don't know what the name of the place is. The house has three rooms in the main-building, with four side-rooms, besides two rooms facing the main range. In the East angle there's a kitchen and a room for you. I must find a place to put up a w.-c. after I've moved in. b. And when do YOU mean to move, Sir ? a. I want to move over to-day as soon as possible, so as to be able to reckon from the beginning of the month, when paying the rent there. /;. Then I must make haste and put all the things together to-day. a. H'm. Well, first move all the small tilings into the court- yard. i?weep the carpet first with tea-leaves, roll it up and cord it. Then take the bookshelves and the cupboard, and tlie rest of the hea\-y things, pick out the strong ones and pack them in the big cart that Liu Erh has hired. b. Ye& ; and I think, Sir, it will bu baler if all your small articles outside are put in a large packing case, and the coolie carried them on a pole. a. Very good, but all the crockery must be carefully wrapped in paper. If the bedstead can't be carried, it must be unshipped and put together after it has been taken across, and then the curtains can be put up as before. 80 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PAKT III b. Must the nails that the scrolls and the inscription tablet used to hang from be pulled out, Sir ? a. H'm. Hi ! hi ! Do take cave and not knock all the dust on the wall down ! Why don't you pull them out with pincers instead of knocking them out with a hammer ? b. Yes, Sir. a. Hi ! Tell the coolie to be careful, when he's going through the front gate, not to spoil the table by knocking it about. b. Yes, Sir. I'd better go along with the things, and ar- range them beforehand as they were before, hadn't I ? a. No, you needn't do that yet. When the place has been swept, and the carpet put down; the tables and chairs can be put anywhere for the time, until I go over and arrange them properly in their places ; and if you can't do it all by yourself you can get someone to help you. But everything must be taken over within the day, mind that ! b. Yes, Sir. No. 10 It's a fine day to-day, and there's no wind ; you must air the clothes. b. Yes, and shall I air the bedding too ? a. H'm. Bring a piece of cord first, and tie it from this post to the tree ; when you've done that, hang the clothes on the line to dry. b. Yes, Sir. Then perhaps 1 had best carry out the leather trunk and the box into the court. tr. H'm. Here are the keys, open the boxes yourself. The fur-cloak, the fur-coat, and the long cloak without wleeves, that are hanging on the clothes-horse, must be aired in a shady place, b. Yes, Sir. * * I've shaken out the clothes, and put them to air in the sun. Will you go and have a look, Sir. a. H'm. Well, I'll go and see * * What's this ? Didn't I tell you the skin-clothes must be aired in the shade? What have you hung them up with the other clothes Tor ? Surely you know if you ever put skin things in the sun. the fur turns yellow. It. Yes, Sir. Then shall 1 get u stick and put it through them and hang it on the nail ? a. Thai will do ; and presently you must shake them out thoroughly. /'. Yes, Sir. a. And those clothes there must be sorted into double things and wadded ones. b. These ones are wadded. PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 81 a. Begin hanging them on a line from this end an. Yes, Sir. I think at midday they should be turned the other side about, and the ones that have been in the sun eliange places, and make those that are in the shade get the sun, don't you think so, Sir .' a. Yes, that will do very well. And now finish doing this, and then take the boxes and knock them out. f>. Yes, Sir; and till what time would you like the things aired before I put them away ? a. Wait till the sun is just over the hills about, but mind, you must fasten the cord up into the room, and let them be exposed to the draught, otherwise if the woollen things are put into the boxes with the heat still in them, their gloss will go oft' them and they will be spoilt. b. Yes, Sir ; and what about the silk and satin things? a. They are just the same, so this evening put them by as they are, for the time, and to-morrow morning put them away as they were before in the boxes, in layers and with paper in between ; put in some camphor, cover them over with a wrapper and stuff it in tightly all round on each side, and put on the lid, or else the the camphor will evaporate. b. Yes, Sir. a. Here, wind up the string as it was before and hang it on the beam in the store-room. b. Yes, Sir. Please, Sir, I can't remember at the moment how you fold the Japanese clothes. a. Oh, what a useless creature you are ! I took such pains to show you, and you've forgotten it again. You've no memory at all. Look here, they are folded like this. First fold over the left-hand lower edge, then take the right-hand lower edge and fold it over on to the top of that, after that take the dress and give it a pull out, double the collar over on top, smooth it out flat, told over the two sleeves outside each side, give another double over, and there you are. b. Thank you kindly for showing me, Sir. NO. 11 a. Boy ! b. Yes, Sir ! a. I'm going to invite some people to dinner to-uioiTow; go into the Chinese city and engage a place. b. How many guests do you intend to ask, Sir ? 12 82 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART II a. About ten, I think, there will be. b. Oh, then a dining-saloon will be better than a restaurant. a. What's the difference between the two ? b. In a dining-saloon the dinners are ready laid ; in a re- staurant the dinners are either ready laid or you can order things separately. But when there are many guests a dining-saloon is best. a. What are " dinners ready laid " ? b. A " dinner ready laid " means one with eight principal dishes and four sorts of cold vegetables, and any "extras" wanted besides can be had at will. a. And when you order separately ? b. Then you tell them to do for you on the spot whatever you have a fancy for. . Oh, then the dinner ready laid will be more comfortable ; but mind, the dishes ordered must be plain, not rich. b. Which dishes, Sir, do you think would be most to liking of your guests ? a. Oh, I can't call to mind the names of the dishes ; you must choose some that are not too rich, and decide as you think best after consideration. You had better give 100 tiao a head. I want huang chin not shoo chin, for wine. b. Will you go to the theatre ? a. Well, I understand at Chinese dinners they generally go to the theatre, so I will do the same. b. If you want to engage them immediately, I'm afraid there won't be any boxes to be had ; if there aren't, will ordinary seats do ? a. Yes, they will do ; if you take boxes, mind and find ones that are not behind a column. b. It's of no consequence, I suppose, whether they are on the left or the right side of the stage. a. The right side is best ; on the other the gongs are such a nuisance. Another thing, the last two days when I was at the theatre, I saw a man eating in the box opposite ; is that all right ? b. Why yes, Sir, quite. It is mostly done when there are h&iany kung invited to meet the guests. a. Who do you call hsiang kung ? 6. Haven't you seen very good-looking young actors often standing at the side of the stage, Sir ? PART 111 THE Or IDE TO KUAN-Hl'A. 83 a. Oh, I remember. Yes, certainly, there are people like that. What do they do ? b. Sometimes they sing on the stage, sometimes they come in with the wine. If you would like to see, Sir, to-morrow when I go to the dining-saloon, T can send a slip of paper, and tell one or two to come in with the wine; it adds -very much to the exhilaration of drinking. a. Why, it would be very jolly. b. If you would like a Military Piece, Sir, you will have a Tastanet accompaniment. If you like a piece from civil history, you have a flute accompaniment. it. I should like flutes best. b. Then \vill you hear the San Ch'ing or the Ssii Hsi? . The Ssii Hsi, I think. b. Then I will go now and make arrangements. a. Oh, and the tips for the waiters, and the theatre-money, I will pay them to-morrow through you. b. Yes, Sir. No. 12 fl. Have you changed those ten dollars yet ? /;. Yes, Sir, I have. a. What did you get for them? b. 114 tiao 4 pat 4. a. What rate for the dollar? b. 11 tiao 4 pai 4. a. How's that ? That's a better exchange than yesterday. b. Yes, Sir, the value of silver has risen. a. How is it, it has risen again ? b. Because of the heavy fall in the market-rate. a. Who fixes the market-rate then ? b. You don't understand, Sir. At the Chu Pao Shih, outside the Ch'ien Men, there is a Silver-Market. Very early every day people from all the cash-banks in Peking go to the market to buy and sell silver. If there is much silver on the market on a particular day, the rate falls ; if there is little, the rate rises. When the buying and selling is all arranged, the amount of cash for which a tael exchanges becomes the rate of that day, and all the cash-shops in the Tartar City go by this rate. There can't be any certainty about the buying and selling of silver j each day has its own rate. 84 THE GUTDE TO KUAN-HDA. PART TIT a. Then how much does a dollar exchange for in taels? b. The general rate is reckoned as seven mace to the dollar, and the trade-dollar and the Mexican dollar are supposed to be the same value, and the Japanese dollar to exchange for a little less ; but practically there is no difference. Here are the notes, Sir ; they're all issued by Ho Feng. a. I simply can't read the amounts written on the notes ; what do they have such writing as that on them for ? b. This is a large 50-fc'ao note, this is for 10 tiao, these are small notes for 5 tiao, 4 tiao, 3 tiao, and '2 tiao. This is the small change for the 4 pai 4. a. Yes, I will count over the notes iny-solf. b. Do you make them right ? a. Yes, quite right; but this ~*()-tinn note will be of no uso ; take it away and get 5 tiao's worth of cash, and change tho rest into small notes. b. Yes ; do you want them from the same bank ? a. If the same bank has no small notes, you may exchange it for some from another, but mind, the bank's name must be a reliable one. b. Of course. I'll change it at the Ssii Heng, that will be quite safe. a. Well, go and do so. No. 13 Where have you been ? b. Just now my own elder brother came in from the country to see me, and told me my mother was very ill. He took me outside to speak to for a time ; that's why I have been all this time, and wasn't able to tell you, iSir. a. That's all nonsense. Never mind how long you go out for, yor ought to let me know. b. Yes, I shan't venture to be so thoughtless in future, Sir. Oh, and another thing, I want to ask a few days' leave to go home and tend my mother while she is sick. a. Is your mother really sick ; aren't you getting leave on false pretences ? b. If I were as bold as bold could be, Sir, I could never dare to bring down a sickness on my mother. a. Well, as it is true then, how many days' leave do 3-011 want to have ? b. If my mother's illness is not serious, I will come back in two or three days, but if by any chance my mother should have PART IH THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 85 something mortal, then I'm afraid 1 should he some days longer. * a. When you've gone, have you got a substitute? b. There's a friend of mine who has been in service in the French Legation; 1 can get him to come and take my place for a few days. a. What is he like? b. Woll, there's nothing else against him except that he smokes a little opium. a. H'm. No, I don't want an opium -smoker. The best way will be this, you needn't find a substitute, but get Mr. Wu's boy to look after me for you for a few days. b. That will be better, yes. a. When do you want to go ? b. If you will let me gd, Sir, I will get away from the city this evening. a. Well, if you want to get out of the city to-day, a* it's getting on now, don't dawdle, but look sharp and put things away. b. There's one other thing, Sir, I hope you will advance me next month's wages. a. I haven't got so much money, so I can't advance yon the whole of it. I'll give you $8 in advance, and besides that I will make you a present of $1. b. Thank you, Sir, for being so kind. a. Well, now go and fetch Mr. Wu's boy, and give him over everything that concerns the room, so that he quite understands, and fetch out the lamp-globe you broke yesterday, and give it over to him, and tell him to-morrow to match it with another of the same kind. b. Yes, Sir. No. 14 . There's a visitor coming to-morrow ; take the coolie with you and clean out the guest-room. b. Yes, Sir. There's one of the three divisions that has the awning broken and the framework of the awning fallen down, and the paper of the wall has peeled off from the damp. a. H'm. Yes, you're right. Well, you must tell a paper- hanger to come and paper it. b. Yes, Sir. You have some flowered white paper by you, haven't you, Sir ? 86 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART III a. Yes, ever so many reams of it. You must paper the lower half of the walls with foreign paper, and put a border of the blue- lined paper all round on the awning. b. Very good, Sir. And we must buy a dozen or so of millet- stalks to lash the framework together. a. H'm. Well, can you have it all finished in one day .' b. The days are so long now, we can finish it in the day quite well. a. And the scaffolding, have we to furnish the man with the poles ? b. No, they bring those themselves. a. What else is there to be bought .' l>. Why, there's the flour to make paste, and some bamboo- slips, and some hemp-cord three things. a. Well, first of all go and sweep out thoroughly the two divisions in the outer room, and if there are any cobwebs on the awning you must sweep them away ; clean the glass of the windows, too ; then take a duster, dip it in water, wring it dry, and scrub the floor ; and mind and be careful not to dirty the wall with the duster. Now go and set to work. b. Yes, Sir. a. Here ! b. Yes, Sir ! a. I've just got a letter, it's no good ; the visitor will be here directly. b. Why, but the awning hasn't been papered ; what had we better do ? a. Well, look here; go at once and clean out the room, and ask the gentleman to put up with it for the time. b. Yes, Sir. a. Listen ; there's a cart has pulled up outside the front gate ; it's probably the visitor. b. If you please, Sir, it is the visitor arrived. a. I'll go and receive him first ; you tell the coolie to be quick and sweep out the room, and you go out and bring in the luggage. b. The luggage is all brought in ; will you ask the gentleman to count over the number, and see if they're all right. a. Yes, the gentleman says they are quite right. b. Oh, and the carter says you've forgotten to give him his $2 for the fare. PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 87 a. Take out these two dollars to him then, and go and see if the room has been cleaned out ; take the luggage and move it into the room and arrange it properly, and then come and make some tea and draw some water to wash with. b. Yes, Sir. No. 15 . What ! another lamp-globe broken. b. So there is ; that's another one spoilt. a. I'm always telling you, when the lamp is first lit the flame wants to be low, and then, after a bit, to be turned up higher ; but you never pay any attention ; you've got no memory at all. Last year you did the same thing, you never improve. The fact is, you didn't pay any attention to what I told you ; what do you mean by it ? b. Well, it was because of my being careless for once. a. Oh, it isn't only " i'or once " that you have been careless. You never at any time have been careful. Take last winter for instance, you never once cleaned the stove. This year, when the lire was left oft", you didn't even clear out the coal left inside, and you didn't put any polish on the stove, but just threw it into the lumber-room, and after some time it was all covered with rnst. And the coal too, stacked like that in the courtyard, any day it might catch fire. b. I didn't know it was. a. Then you must be blind ! b. It is the coolie's business, not for me to look after. a. Don't talk such stupid nonsense ! Can't you tell the coolie to put it away ? b. I have told him ever so many times, but he won't mind. a. Don't keep on making excuses. You're always so obstinate. b. How am I obstinate? a. Well, tell me then, yesterday when I came back, where had you gone ? b. I hadn't gone anywhere at all. a. Then what do you mean by taking no notice when the things in the room here were all topsy-turvy and had brought ever bo many rlies in ? b. Why, a friend of mine came and kept me some time, so I couldn't put things to rights. a. Well, I don't care ; but after this, when I go out, you will just have to make the room quite tidy, fold up the clothes, put 88 THE GUIDE TO KUA&-HUA. PART UI on some coals in the small stove, bank up the ashes, see what there is that isn't wanted, empty out and throw away whatever has to be emptied or thrown away, then you'll have eyes in your head; but never to do a thing until you are told of it, is that the way a man should do? Besides that, you arc for ever smashing things, it isn't the way to do at all. Then lately you have got another bad habit, when your friends come you take out all sorts of things of mine and use them. Do you think that's the right thing ? b. When have I taken your things, Sir? a. Don't refuse to acknowledge it. Yesterday you took some of my tea, for I came in very quitcly and saw you. b. I didn't take it. a. As you say you didn't take it, I will go just now to your room and search. b. You can go and search and welcome. a. Look here ! What's this ? Are you still stubborn ? b. I bought that myself. a. Here it is, the thing stolen and the man that stole it. If you still refuse to confess, go and be d d to you, / don't want you ! b. Don't get angry, Sir. I did take your things, Sir ; please forgive me. . Well, since you've confessed, I'll keep you. But in future, if you continue to have these bad habits you will have to march at once. b. Yes, Sir ; my respects to you, Sir, and thank you for your kindness. No. 16 Oh please, Sir, your bridle is broken. b. Broken, where ? a. The bit is broken. b. Then take it to the saddler's to be mended. a. Yes, Sir. b. And look here, latterly the saddle, stirrups, and the girths, and all that gear, have got fearfully dirty. Why don't you look ai'tur them I a. Not a bit, Sir, every day I look after them. b. Then how could the iron- work on them have got rusted ? a. It's because I haven't rubbed them with brickdust. /;. The last few days I have ridden, the pony has seemed weak in the feet, and kept on stumbling ; what's the reason of that ? PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-11UA. 89 a. It's true, Sir. / noticed he had a trick of that, too. b. I think very likely he's cast a shoe, or perhaps been badly shod, it may be that possibly. a. Well, I'll take him to the veterinary surgeon's to-day and have him shod over again. b. Yes, you might. And another thing, how is it the beast never makes flesh ? a. What, not make flesh ! It's you can't see it, Sir, that's what it is. b. I can see perfectly well. I know what it is ; it is because you don't feed him at night. If the beast goes on not putting on flesh, why I won't let you have the contract for his feed. . Don't say that, Sir. Whether it's bran, black pulse, red millet, Indian corn, or hay, there's none of them I don't give him plenty of. b. This morning I saw a whole lot of water standing outside the stable-door ; what water was it ? a. That wasn't my doing ; it was the man that looks after the bath-room did it. b. Tell him to come here then, a. Yes, Sir, I'll go and find him. c. Do you want to have a bath now, Sir ? b. I've got a question to ask you first. What did you throw the dirty water from the bath outside the stable for ? c. It wasn't thrown there. It's the mouth of the drain is stopped up, and the water has overflowed. b. Then you will have to clean the drain out. c. Yes, Sir ; I will go and clean it at once. Isn't to-day the day you have your bath, Sir ? b. Have you heated any bath-water ? c. Yes, it's all ready and poured into the bath. b. Then take the towels and soap and come with me. Step forward a pace first until I have finished making water. c. Yes, Sir. b. Look here, you must sweep the bath-room floor clean, and not make it so slippery as this. c. Yes, Sir. Is the water too hot, Sir ? U 90 THE GUIDE T6 KUAN-HUA. PART 111 b. It is rather; put in a little more cold, and give me a scrubbing. c. Yes, Sir. b. Is there much dirt on me ? c. Not very much. b. Well, rub me quite clean. c. Yes, Sir. No. 17 1 ani going to Shanghai, so pack up niy things. b. How soon do you start, Sir ? a. In a day or two. b. Then shall you take the heavy baggage too ? a. No, no. I mean to ask some friend to sell it by auction. This evening and all night I will separate the things to be sold by auction from those I'm leaving, and then you arrange them. b. Shall 1 empty out these boxes first, and stick these small odds and ends inside? a. All right, but when you have, you must wedge them all tightly in with packing-straw or cotton-wool, so that they shan't shake about. b. Yes, of course ; and' what about the clothes .' a. As soon as they are packed in the leather trunk, make them into one bundle with the soft-stuff things. b. Very good. a. And the books in the bookshelves, the rubbings, and the scrolls, wrap them all in paper. b. I'll just take out the characters from the presentation tablet ; the frame can't be taken, what's to be done with it ? a. Never mind that for the present. b. The boxes are packed, Sir ; when the lids are put on, 1 might nail them down at once, I suppose. a. Yes, certainly. Give nie that sheet of red paper, I'll write some labels to stick on the boxes. b. The lock of the leather trunk must be turned and it must be packed in packing-matting, and after that corded up, and then it will be saved from being knocked about by the cart. PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HDA. 91 a. Quite right ; and the knots in the cord must be tied quite tight, in case after the box is put in the cart it might shake loose. Be quick and send the coolie to buy two sheets of oiled paper, to wrap up the silks in. b. Yes, Sir ; and hadn't I better take down the cloth portiere and roll it up ? a. Very well; and put the cover on the sunshade; and then take these writing-materials and pack them in the white box for presents. b. Shall I roll up your bedding now ? a. Fold up the double coverlet andjthe wadded quilt, and put them inside the mattress-cover. Ttie mattress I shall want spread in the cart to-morrow. b. Yes, Sir ; and how would it he, do you think, to-morrow, to make the box in matting fast at the back of the cart ? a. All right ; and before packing the crockery you must dip some paper in water and stick it on to it to make it safe. b. Yes, that's a capital plan. If you please, Sir, Mr. C. has sent somebody with a parting present for you. a. Bring it in. Take out a card and tell him to go back and give my thanks for it. No. 18 a. What have you been doing ? b. I've been watering the flowers in the garden. a. How are the flowers looking ? b. Just now they are in full bloom ; there's a beautiful show of blossoms. a. What's all that mud on your hands ? b. I have been handling soil in the garden. a. As soon as you've had your meal, I want to send you with a present. b. Yes, Sir ; for what house is it ? a. For Mr. Hsu, at the Hou Men. b. Then I'd better have my head shaved now first. a. Ob, it's not enough to have your head shaved, you must have your queue dressed. b. It's all done at one time, shaving and dressing the queue. a. You must put on some cleaner clothes too. Your common Ones you do your dirty work about the house in, they'll never look nice. When you go to another house, if you want to do the proper thing, you must be tidy. 92 THE GtTTDE TO KUAN-HFA. PART ITI /;. The fact is, Sir, I haven't got any boots or hat. a. You can borrow a hat and a pair of shoes from the other servants. Now look sharp and go and get ready; don't waste time. b. I'm quite ready now, Sir. Pleaso give me what orders you have for me. And have you sorted out the presents, Sir? a. Look here, here are four boxes of things, and here's my official card. /;. I must go and hire a cart then ? a. Not at all, the things inside are fragile, and the cart might jolt them, so you will have to tell the coolie to go along with you and carry them. b. Yes, that will do very well. a. When yon get there say, " These things are special local products brought by my master, who has recently come back from the country, which he has taken the liberty to send for your master's use ; " and you must be sure and leave the card ; then come back home. b. Yes, Sir ; then I can go now, Sir ? a. Oh, and besides that, go into the garden and pick a few bunches of flowers and take with you, and leave them at Mr. Wu's house on your way. b. I've come back, Sir. a. Was Mr. Hsii at home ? b. Yes, Sir, and he called me in and said, " Yonr master should have kept these things, that he has brought back from ever so far off, for his own use ; why should he have troubled himsely to think of me ? It makes me feel quite uncomfortable." With that he gave me a card in return, and I was to thank you for your kind attention, Sir. a. Yes, and what's that red packet you have in your hand ? b. Oh yes, to be sure ! I was going to tell you, Sir, it is a present that the gentleman there gave me. I did want not to accept it, but Mr. Hsii said, "You just take it; if you don't accept if, why I shall be angry," and so I felt forced to accept it from him. a. Well, well, go and rest a bit. PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HTTA. 93 No. 19 (i- Have you finished washing your face ? b. I have, Sir. a. I want to send you out to buy some things. b. What things, Sir ? a. I want to get some mushrooms from outside the Wall, some dried prawns, and some dough-strips. b. Shall I buy them at the Ssu P'ai-lou ? a. No, not from the Ssu P'ai-lou. Those shops there haven't a single good one amongst them. /;. Then shall I go into the Chinese city to get them ? a. The best way will be to get them in the Chinese city, at a salt provisions' store on the east of the Ch'ien Men Street. />. Ah, yes ; their things are certainly good, but rather dear. a. They are, but nothing out of the way. b. How much do you want, Sir? . I want one catty of mushrooms, a catty and a-half of dried prawns, and ten strips of dough. Now how much are the mushrooms a catty ? b. Some are 6 tiao 4, and some 4 tiao 8. a. The cheaper ones are not so good, no doubt? b. Of course. a. Then buy the dearer ones, but make them give you full weight. b. They wouldn't dare to give short weight. a. Well, it is the way of these trading people to be in the habit of asking extravagant prices, so don't you simply agree to what they ask, you must bargain back. b. But yon don't know, Sir, the large shops have all fixed prices ; they wouldn't think of asking extravagant prices. a. That's all right then. Also bring some fresh fruit from outside the city, for me. b. What sort of fruit do you want, Sir ? a. Are there any apricots and plums to be had still? b. No, there are no more of those two kinds now. a. Then buy some pears, peaches, apples, sha-kuo-tzu [a small variety of apple], some small, red apples [/?m'-tew], dried dates, and grapes, those sorts. b. How much of each ? 94 THE GUIDE TO KUAtt-IIUA. PART III a. Buy one catty of grapes, and one of dates, and get ten of each sort of all the rest. b. Yes, Sir. a. Take this 40-ft'ao note with you ; and besides getting these things, mind and buy some sugar-candy and arrow-root with the spare cash. b. Yes, Sir ; then I'll be going now at once. a. Wait a bit; look here, here is a bad \0-tiao note ; take it to the Wan Shun Furriers' shop in the Chu Shih K'ourh, and tell them it is a forged note, and they are to change it im- mediately for another and give you that to bring back. b. But how do you know it is their bad note, Sir ? a. I marked it ; and besides, I went there to buy something some days ago, and they got it for me. b. After that have you anything more, Sir? a. Yes, I have. As you come back, just take that tailor's shop on your road, and inquire if the article I ordered is ready or not; if it is, wrap it up in a parcel and bring it home. No. 20 Chang Fu ! b. Sir ! a. Come here ; I've something to say to you. b. Yes, Sir, what have you to tell me ? a. There's a gentleman, that has been promoted to be Consul at Canton, who is looking out for a servant, and I'm thinking of recommending you to him. Would you like to go or not ? b. I'm much beholden to you, Sir, for your great kindness, and I should like to go, but then I don't know for how many years it will be. a. This gentleman would probably have to remain three years at Canton. If he is willing for you to stay with him there for three years, what do you say ? b. Yes, I wouldn't mind that. a. But there's one thing now; if this gentleman, when the three years are up, should be promoted to another place, he would pay you your passage and send you back here ; and if before the end of the three years he discharges you, he will also pay your passage back here. But if, before the three years are up, you yourself leave his service to come back, then you'll have to find the passage-money, and it will be no affair of his whatever. b. Yes, I understand, Sir. PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 95 a. Then about wages; the gentleman offers to give you $10 a month, and he will find you in clothes all the year round. What do you say ? b. I'm quite willing to take $10 a month wages, but there are two things, Sir, I'd be much obliged if you would mention, Sir. a. What are they ? b. One is, I hope you'll first ask the gentleman to advance me $10 as an allotment to my family. The other is, that five or six dollars a month of my wages should be paid in Peking to my family, so as to save the trouble of their getting the money to Peking from a distance. a. Yes, I'll speak to him about that ; that can be managed. But about advancing you $10 as allotment-money, what sort of deduction a month do you propose ? b. It can be as the gentleman pleases ; he could stop a dollar or two dollars every month. a. Very well. b. If the gentleman agrees to these two things, I should like to pay the money to my family through your hands, Sir. a. Very proper. As soon as it is all settled I will write a pay order and give it you. Someone from your family can be sent to me on the first of each month, with the pay order, to fetch the money. b. I am much obliged to you, Sir. Now, after I'm gone, Sir, you will want another servant, won't you, Sir. What do you think if a relative of mine came into your service, Sir? a. How old is he ? b. Eighteen this year. a. Has he been in service before ? b^ Yes, Sir, he was in service first in the Russian Legation. a. Well, let that stand over for a bit, because there's a gentle- man that has recommended a servant to me. He is coming in a day or two on trial. If he won't do, then tell your relative to come. b. I'll wait till I hear from you, Sir, then. a. Within the next day or two put all my things in order, so that you can hand them over to the new man, and reckon up everything outstanding from first to last. b. Yes, Sir ; and supposing everything is decided, when shall I commence work ? a. Well, there are eight days more from now to the end of the month, then, of course, you'll begin work on the first of next month. b. Very well. 96 THE GUlDli I'O KUAN-HUA PAKT IV PART IV. No 1. This is His Excellency our newly-appoined Minister. H.E. has called for the purpose of paying his respects to Your Highness and Your Excellencies, the Grand Secretary and the Ministers. b. Ah, wo have been looking forward to this moment, and that we should to-day be so fortunate as to meet shows, I assure you, a predestined connection between us. a. The Minister begs to inquire after the health of Your Highness and Your Excellencies. b. Thank you, thank yon ! Pray beg H.E. the Minister to take the seat of honour. a. The Minister says that he could not venture to take that seat, which he begs Your Highnsss will take. b. But that is impossible ; this being H.E.'s first visit to our Office, the place of honour is his by right. a. In that case, the Minister says, he shall bow to your wishes. b. Quite right, quite right! When did H.E. arrive in Peking ? a. On the 16th of this month. , b. We have long ago heard what an impartial administrator H.E. here is, and what an extreme value he sets upon friendly relations. Now that he has been appointed to represent his Government in this country he will not fail in his conduct of relations to be guided in all things by a spirit of justice and fairness, to the advantage of the people of both countries. Nothing could be more fortunate ! a. The Minister says that Your Highness and Your Ex- cellencies are far too flattering. He is painfully conscious of his own deficiencies and of his unfitness to undertake this responsible position, in which he shall at all times beg Your Highness and Your Excellencies to afford him your advice. b. His Excellency is really too modest. It is we who will beg advice from H.E. a. The Minister says that that would be presumption on his part. b. May I enquire how old H.E. is ? PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 97 a. The Minister is sixty-one this year. b. H.E.'s cjire of his health must be excellent indeed, to have passed his sixth decade and remain so vigorous as he does. a. Dja ! b. (to serrant*) Some refreshments and fruit, and heat some wine. a. The Minister says that, this being his first visit to Yonr Excellencies' Yanieii, he could not think of trespassing on your hospitality. b. H.E. is punctilious. It is true we have met H.E. to-day for the first time, but we seem like old friends, and besides, there is nothing here but some ordinary refreshments to help us to prolong the interview. I hope H.E. will give us the honour of his company and, not decline. a. The Minister says that he really feels disturbed at having put Your Highness and Your Excellencies to such trouble. b. Not at all. There is nothing here at all adequate to meet the occasion ; I hope H.E. will excuse it. a. Thank you, thank you; the Minister says this is altogether too sumptous an entertainment. b. There is nothing here at all ; it is quite inadequate. b. Allow me to offer Y.E. a glass of wine. a. The Minister says it is really too great an honour. b. Pray be seated Y.E. a. The Minister begs Your Highness to accept a glass in return. b. No, indeed, I could not venture to accept that. a. Then I will return the toast to Your Highness and Your Excellencies on behalf of the Minister. b. You are our guest, Sir, how could we allow it ? Well, let us fill our own glasses then. a. Very well, since obedience is better than deference. b. No ceremony, no ceremony. Ask H.E. to try some of this dish. a. The Minister begs that Your Highness and Y.E.E. will not pass the dishes to him, but allow him to help himself. b. If H.E. will eat heartily, why we will not help him to the dishes. a. The Minister says he will on no account make any pretences. b. That's capital ! 14 98 THE GUIDE T6 KUAN-HUA. PART IV b. Pray take a little more Y.E. a. The Minister says he is fully satisfied. b. Then ask H.E. to come and sit in the room over there. * % * * * a. The Minister begs to inquire of Your Highness and Y.E.E. when he can present his credentials ? b. With regard to that, we will communicate officially with H.E. in a day or two, after we have memorialized His Majesty and requested his commands as to the date. a. Then he will await word from Your Highness. b. Very good. a. The Minister desires to take his leave now and to return home. b. Why should we not have a little more conversation ? a. The Minister has some other important business which requires him to return and dispose of at once, and prevents him making a long stay here. He begs to express his thanks to Your Highness and Your Excellencies for your trouble. b. The merest trifle, not worth mentioning, done without any ceremony whatever. a. Not at all. b. We shall return this visit shortly at your Legation. a. You are very kind indeed. Pray Your Highness and Y.E.E. do not come out. b. Good-day, good-day ! a. Au revoir, au revoir ! No. 2 o. I hope Y.E. has been well since we last met. b. Thank you, Your Highness, quite well ; and I hope Your Highness has been in good health lately. a. Yes, thank you. b. And Your Excellencies the 'Grand Secretaries and the others have also been well I hope. c. You are very kind. Did you return home comfortably the other day ? b. Quite ; I am much obliged to Y.E.E. for your kind inquiries. a. The object of our visit to-day is, in the first place, to offer our congratulations, and, secondly, to return Your Excellency's call, PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HDA. 99 b. You are too kind. Your Highness and Y.E.E. the Grand Secretaries and the others are more than polite. d. I hope you will excuse us for coming late. b. Don't mention it. What is this gentleman's name ? for we have not met before. c. Of course! We had forgotten. Let me introduce you to each other. This gentleman is the newly-appointed Minister H.E. ; this gentleman is Liu tajen, one of our colleagues. b. I am delighted to make your acquaintance. d. The pleasure is mutual then. I hope you will forgive my absence the other day, when you were good enough to call, but I was on leave at the time. b. Don't mention it! May I ask what is Your Excellency's native place ? d. I am a Kiangsu man. b. Which of the public offices are you a member of ? d. I am at present Vice-President of the Board of Civil Office, and a member of the Tsungli Yamen. b. Ah ! And when did Y.E. take your degree? d. I took my chii-jen's degree in the clii mao year, and my chin-shin degree in the kuei wei. b. What provincial posts have you held ? d. I have never held a provincial appointment. From the kuei wei year, after my success I took up my position in the Han Lin Yuan. Later on, I was appointed once to a Literary Chancellorship and once to a Chief Examinership. b. In which province were you appointed Literary Chancellor ? d. I was appointed Literary Chancellor in Ssu-ch'uan, and my subsequent appointment as Chief Examiner was in Shensi. b. What is Y.E.'s age ? d. I am forty-seven this year. b. It is easy to perceive that Y.E.'s abilities must be great, when you have held such distinguished posts before reaching your fiftieth year. d. You flatter me ; it is all due to good luck. Indeed I am ashamed of my want of talent, I am a mere stop-gap, that is all. b. Y.E. is over modest. I have prepared a few refreshments to-day, and I hope Your Highness and Y.E.E. will stay here and chat for a while. 100 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV a. You are very kind, and we ought rightly to take advantage of your hospitality. Unfortunately, to-day a matter has been specially remitted to us by Imperial Decree, which we have to return and attend to at once, so we must beg to be excused. b. In that case, then, I will not press you to stay. a. Then we will come and pay our respects to you another day, and take leave of you just now. b. Thank your Highness and Your Excellencies for your visit. a. Not at all. Pray do not come out. b. I must see you oft'. a. Thank you, thank you. No. 3 . Allow me to introduce to Y.E. this gentleman, who is our newly-appointed Minister. H.E. has come to-day in order to pay his respects to Your Excellency. /. Ah ! I am delighted to meet him. a. The Minister hopes Y.E. is well. I. Ah ! I hope lie is well. a. The Minister thanks Y.E. /. And the health of His Imperial Majesty your Sovereign, has been good ? a. Yes, the Minister says that the health of His Majesty our Emperor has been recently excellent, and he begs to inquire whether H.I, Majesty has been enjoying satisfactory health. /. Yes, His Imperial Majesty has been enjoying most satis- factory health. I beg II. E. will take the seat of honour. a. The Minister begs to yield that to Y.E. 1. Impossible ! His Excellency having come here is entitled to the seat of honour. a. The Minister protests that it would be presumption on his part. I. Pray be seated. May I ask when H.E. left his own country ? a. On the 10th of last month by our calendar. I. I hope the journey has been a comfortable one. a. The Minister says that, under Y.E.'s auspices, all has gone very well on the journey. I. What stay did H.E. make in Shanghai? a. The Minister remained only two days in Shanghai before coming on here. PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 101 I. It is a very long journey to make, to come here overland. I don't know if there is any news that we might learn ? a. The Minister says that there were a number of historic spots on the road, but that there is nothing new so far as the politics of the present day are concerned. /. Indeed. And what day has H.E. drilled 'to leave fcr IVking ? . The Minister intends going Noftl, tl>e day after 'to- morrow. 1. Why should H.E. hasten his departure so? a. Because the term of his Mission is about to expire, consequently he cannot loiter. /. Is H.E. going by river or by road ? a. He intends travelling by river, on account of the quantity of baggage he has. I. Have the boats been hired yet ? a. We have sent a man to-day to hire them ; to-morrow, most likely, they will all be ready. I. Tell H.E. that I will despatch two petty officers with twenty men, to escort him to T'ung-chow. a. The Minister says he is extremely obliged to Y.E. for being so kind. /. Not at all. It is my duty to do what I can for H.E. on his arrival here. a. The Minister says it is a great favour on your part. /. Then I will send off a despatch this evening, advising the Tsungli Yamen that H.E. the Minister is starting for the North by river the day after to-morrow. a. That will be excellent. The Minister will also have a despatch for our Legation in Peking. /. Yes, that will be even better. a. And now the Minister says he must take leave. I. Ask H.E. to stay awhile and give me the pleasure of his company for a little longer. a. The Minister has still some business that he must return and despatch at once. I. Well, then, I must thank H.E. for coming to see me, and to-morrow I shall return his call. a. The Minister would not like to put Y.E. to that trouble. L I am bound to. 102 THE GUIDE TO KUAtf-HUA. PART IV a. Pray do not come out. /. I must see you off. a. Thank you very much. !NO. 4 . I- i <00 at Foochow, and it was expressly stated that the balance of $3,000 was to be paid over on arrival at this place, to which the Master then agreed. All this was arranged without any broker or mercantile firm as intermediaries, but was simply an understanding come to directly between the two parties. Four days ago the ship arrived here, and early on the following 108 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV morning Liu Yiin-fa, with some lighters, took delivery of the cargo, lightered it, and conveyed it to the Customs' Examination Shed for examination. He then told the Master he was going home to get together the freight, and would be back on board in the evening, when he would hand over the full amount of the balance in cash, and he also wrote his address and gave it to the Master to keep. So the Master, thinking the man to be a respectable merchant, allowed him to go away. When the evening came, Liu Yiin-fa didn't return on board, and even up to yesterday night he still hadn't come back to the ship. The Master therefore despatched a man to go and look for him at the place he had written down as his address, but as he couldn't be found, the Master couldn't help becoming suspicious, and in consequence reported the matter to the Consul, who wrote a note to the Commissioner of Customs asking him when Liu Yiin-fa paid the duties, to temporarily detain the goods and not release them until the freight had been paid in full. The Consul afterwards received a note from the Commissioner in reply, saying that if Liu Yiin-fa paid his duties in full, the Customs had no power to temporarily detain the goods, so that he would be unable to do as requested in the matter. The Consul, fearing Liu Yiin-fa might suddenly pay the duties, and the Customs release the boats and their cargoes, and that in this way this money for freight would not be recovered, has sent me here to ask you to write to the Commissioner of Customs, if Liu Y r iin-fa pays his duties, to temporarily detain the boats and their cargoes, and when he has paid for the freight, the Consul will notify you officially, so that you may write to the Commissioner to release the gooils. He entreats you most earnestly to oblige him by doing this, and we shall be most deeply grateful. b. Well, as to that, officially speaking, when Liu Y'iin-fa has paid the full duties, the Customs have really no right to detain the boats and their cargoes ; but as the Consul asks me a favour, I will, merely from private regard for him, ask the Commissioner to temporarily detain Liu Yim-fa's boats with their cargoes. And as soon as he has paid the freight, please let the Consul send me word of it, so that I may notify the Commissioner, and the boats and cargo be released. But this is only done on this occasion by way of obliging, and must not be used as a precedent for the future. a. If you will be so obliging as to do so, we shall really be infinitely grateful. b. Not at all ! In a short time I will send a note to the Commissioner. a. Then I shall say good-bye. PAflT IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HIT A. ]()'. b. Good-bye, good-bye. a. An revoir, No. 8 i. I havo been sent here to-day by the Taotai to see you, Sir, on business li. What business is it? ft. Yon wrote to the Taotai some time ago about a native firm dealing in foreign goods bore, called Ch'ing Ch'ang, the head of which, Chao Hsi-san, had bargained to buy sixty bales of Russian cloth from the foreign firm of T'ien Sheng. Yon said that a written agreement had been made, and that when the goods arrived last month, the foreign merchant pressed Chao Hsi-san to take delivery, bnt he would not do so, and tried to find fault with the goods. And yon asked the Taotai to give orders to the Chih hsien to summon Chao Hsi-san before him for examination. Since then the Chih hsien has reported on the case. He says the man has now been summoned, and this is what he states. Last year, before the river closed, he bargained with the foreign firm of T'ien Sheng for sixty bales Russian cloth, and signed a written agreement. He paid a hundred taels deposit, and it vas distinctly stated that the goods were to be delivered and the price paid without delay on either side in the first ten days of the third moon of this year. When this date arrived the goods had come to hand, and the T'ien Sheng hong sent a message to him. He then took his muster to the foreign hong, and opened the bales and compared them ; among them were ten not up to muster, and for that reason he refused to receive the goods, and demanded to be paid back his deposit, telling the foreign merchants to dispose of the goods elsewhere, but they would not give him back his deposit. Well, they separated without coming to any agreement, and to his surprise, the foreign merchants have actually laid a complaint against him for refusing to take delivery, which he has done simply because the goods are not up to muster, and not in the least because he wants an excuse to get out of his engagement. The Taotai wrote to you giving the substance of the Chih hsien's report, and afterwards received your reply that what Chao Hsi-san stated in his evidence before the Magistrate was an ex parte statement and was insufficient as proof, and asking that the Chih hsien might be instructed once more to make Chao Hsi-san take delivery of the goods and make payment of the money. Now the Taotai says that although Chao Hsi-san's statement is an ex parte one, yet, nnforfunately, as he affirms that he has refused to take delivery on account of the goods not being up to muster, if he is now compelled to receive and pay for them, it will not make him feel he has been treated with justice. If 110 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV we accept Chao Hsi-san's statement as the truth, then the foreign merchant will perhaps not be contented. Now the Taottii has thought of a good plan, and has sent me to discuss it with you. He proposes that, some day this month, he and you should hold a joint investigation and summon the two parties, telling the foreign merchant to hire some men to carry the sixty hales into Court, and that yon, Sir, and himself should hold :i si Mini?, and have a public inspection of the good-;, ami then and there give judgment as to which is in the right. 1 don't know what you will think of this proposal. b. I had not made up my mind about this matter, but as the two parties each have their own version, it will be difficult to decide. The Taotai's scheme is very satisfactory, still in my own opinion it would be well that the Taotai should instruct Chao Hsi-san to invite two Chinese merchants, and I should instruct the T'ien Sheng hong to procure two foreign merchants, and for them all to meet at the Mixed Court, where the four merchants would inspect the goods, and see whether they do or do not correspond with the samples, and make their verdict authoritative. If these four should decide after inspection that the goods and the sample correspond, the Taotai could then make an order that Chao Hsi-san should take delivery and make due payment. If they should not correspond, I could then examine the head of the T'ien Sheng hong, and then decide on some action in consultation with the Taotai. That is my own view; what do you think of it? a. The way you suggest, Sir, is still more perfectly satisfactory in every respect. I will go back and report this to the Taotai before sending you a reply. b. Won't you stay a little longer ? a. I cannot stay long, because I have official duties to attend to. I will pay my respects to you another time, Sir. b. You are very good. a. Pray don't come out, Sir. /;. Au reroir. No. 9 a > The Consul has sent mo here to-day to consult with you on a matter of business. b. What is the business ? a. It is the case of the debt due by Chu Hsiao-shan, the Compradore of the firm of Pao Ch'ang. b. I have already written a despatch to the Consul about that case. I don't know what the Consul's opinion upon it is. PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. Ill a. The Consul's view is this. When dm Hsiao-shan was first engaged by the I'ao Ch'nng linn, written security was given by lour Hnns Hsiang Li, Jen Ho, Fn Shun, aiul Chin Ch'ang. Tlu- secnrity-paper expressly said that, in case of defalcation, etc., on the part of Chu Hsiao-shan, besides reimbursement being made by realising his private effects, whatever sum remained unpaid, the four guarantors would share the liability for equally. This they all agreed to abide by. The other day the Consul received your despatch, in which you say, that besides reimbursing TIs. 1,000 by realising Chu llsiao-shan's private property, the guarantor Chin Ch'ang, the silk piece-goods firm, must be made liable for the payment of TIs. 2,000 of the TIs. 4,000 remaining unpaid, and the three guarantors, Hsiang Li, Jen Ho, and Fu Shun, proprietors of foreign-goods warehouses, must share the liability equally between them for the remaining TIs. 2,000. The Consul finds it really difficult to understand your dealing with the case in this way, and he therefore sent me here to inquire for what reason you do not keep to the provisions of the security-paper, and make all the four guarantors share and share alike, instead of singling out the Chin Ch'ang hong to pay more, and the other three hongs less, than their shares. b. The reason why I make the Chin Ch'ang hong pay more, and the other three hongs less, is this. When I summoned the four guaranteeing firms before me the other day for an in- vestigation, three of the proprietors of the shops, Hsiang Li, Jen Ho, and Fu Shun, pleaded that although when the security- paper was originally drawn up it did provide that in case of future defalcations on the part of the Compradore Chu, besides his private effects being realised for the repayment of the debt, the amount of the debt then left outstanding should be paid iu equal proportions by the four guarantors, yet for some years past the Chin Ch'ang hong had constantly borrowed money from Chu Hsiao-shan to trade with, and that for these loans Chin Ch'ang paid no interest. Consequently, for some years he has derived a good deal of benefit from Chu Hsiao-shan, while we three guaran- tors have had no monetary dealings with Chu Hsiao-shan during these years, and have never derived any benefit from him. If you now make us all equally responsible for his defalcations, it will be most unjust to our three firms. Very well. Then I asked the head of the Chin Ch'ang hong whether what the other three said was a fact. He admitted that he had constantly borrowed money from Chu Hsiao-shan to trade with, and that it was quite true he had benefited to a considerable amount by him ; and that is why I gave judgment Tor TIs. 2,000 to be paid by the Chin Ch'ang hong, and for the other three guarantors to pay the TIs. 2,000 between them. 112 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV All four parties signed a formal statement that they were willing to accept this award, indeed, I exercised no great pressure in the matter. In what way do you consider this decision unjust ? a. Well, I hope you will excuse me, but I will take the liberty of making one remark upon it. b. Pray don't hesitate to speak out plainly, whatever you have to say. a. Then in my opinion, such a decision hardly seems quite fair. b. In what way not quite fair ? a. Your view is that because the Chin Ch'ang hong has for some years derived benefit by Chu Hsiao-shan, you should now adjudge them to be bound to pay more, while the other three guaranteeing firms, Hsiang Li, Jen Ho, and Fu Shun, not having derived such benefit, are to be called upon to pay less. Now, in my humble opinion, in deciding this case you should be guided by what was said in the security-paper, and as that expressly mentions that the four guarantors should share the same degree of liability in making good any future deficit on Chu Hsiao- shan's part, if you now single out the Chin Ch'ang hong to pay more, it is not only a departure from the original agreement of the security-paper, but the other three guarantors will probably think it a lucky escape, which they were scarcely entitled to. As for the argument that the Chin Ch'ang hong constantly borrowed money from Chu Hsiao-shan to trade with, without paying interest, and that as they have nnjoyed a considerable amount of benefit from him for some years, therefore you adjudge them liable for a larger amount, why, the loans from Chu Hsiao-shau to the Chin Ch'ang hong were affairs of purely private friendship, and have nothing to do with this case, and you have no right to import their private transactions into this case at all. As for the three other guarantors, who are trying to pay less than their share, let them give whatever untrue evidence they choose, but as far as you are concerned there certainly can be no occasion to decide in accordance with their assertions. Suppose, for instance, that among the four guarantors two had derived benefit from Chu Hsiao-shan, and two had not, ought the two who had be made to pay, and the other two, who hadn't, to hold themselves aloof altogether ? And, therefore, in the interests of justice, you are bound to call upon all four guarantors, as the security-paper provides, to make payment in equal proportions, and not make any distinctions as to paying more or paying less. b. Your argument is founded on the strict rule, and mine is a modification to meet the circumstances. PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 113 a. Yen may speak of " a modification to meet the circum- stances, r ' but such modifications are permissible only when a strictly regular decision would be impracticable. Now in this case there can be no obstacle to a strictly regular decision being given, so why should there be such a modification? b. Well, since you consider my award not quite fair, will you, when you get back, consult with the Consul, and later on there is no reason why we should not devise some thoroughly well- considered scheme. a. In that case we will discuss the matter again, and I will say good-bye to you, and go back. b. What is your hurry ? Stay alid chat for a little while longer. a. I have some other work to do, so I will wish you good-bye for the present. b. Good-bye to you. a. Au revoir. No. 10 . My visit to your Yamen to-day is to confer with you on a matter of business. b. Ah ! Pray tell me what it is. a. It is about the case in which the Chinese foreign-goods hong, Hsin Ch'eng, are indebted to our nationals, the Heng Yii firm, for goods supplied. When the Heng Yii firm the other day laid a complaint against the Hsin Ch'eng hong, I first of all called Wang Pao-shan, the principal of the Hsin Ch'eng hong, before me and questioned him. His statement was that a native firm of general dealers of this place, called the Fu Shun Chan, owed him some Tls. 10,000 and more for goods supplied, which he had repeatedly pressed them for, but which they had not yet paid ; that if he could recover this sum, he would, besides paying back their Tls. 5,000 to Heng Yii, have a balance over and above of Tls. 5,000, and he begged rne to address you officially, so that you might give orders to the District Magistrate to summon the principal of the Fu Shun Chan before his Court and recover this amount, when lie conld repay his debt for goods supplied by the Heng Yii firm. As I was afraid that the debt to Heng Yii would not be settled, I wrote to you officially to ask you to instruct the District Magistrate to have up and examine the principal of the Fu Shun Chan and recover from him the sum he owed Hsin Ch'eng, with the object of rendering possible the repayment of their liability to the Heng Yu hong. Yang ta- laoyeh, the deputy whom you sent to my office yesterday, said it was suspected that the principal of Hsin Ch'eng had induced the 16 114 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV principal of the Heng Yii foreign hong to bring forward a false charge, and to sue the Fu Shun Chan for their debt, in Hsin Ch'eng's interest, and that if the steps asked for were taken, it would be the beginning of a system of foreign merchants taking up and interfering in legal proceedings ; and he begged me, before proposing anything further, to find out as to this by making close enquiries. Accordingly I sent for the principal of the Heng Yii firm again, and I did closely question him. He declared that it was perfectly true that the Hsin Ch'eng hong owed his firm Tls. 5,000 for goods supplied, as their books would show. He knew nothing about the Fu Shun Chan being indebted to the Hsin Ch'eng hong for goods supplied. With regard to his request that I would move you officially to direct the District Magistrate to summon the principal of the Fu Shun hong for examination and the recovery of the amount owing, it was quite true that that was Wang Pao-shan's suggestion, and not a plan arranged between them two. So now, having clearly ascertained that there is no sharp practice in the matter, I have again to ask you to ask as I requested. b. Yes, but though you have ascertained that there is no dishonest dealing in this matter, all the same, the only proper course is, that the foreign merchant should sue Hsin Ch'eng, and that the latter should lay his complaint against Fu Shun, each account being separately settled. If the parties were to be involved at discretion, although there might be no sharp practice in this case, it would be difficult to prevent abuses arising in the future, and precautions against them must be taken ; do you not think so yourself, Sir ? a. Yes, I think what you say is very reasonable. There's only one point, and that is, that I would ask you to direct the District Magistrate, when Wang Pao-shan comes to the Magistracy with his plaint against Fu Shun, and the Magistrate recovers the money owing to Hsin Ch'eug, not to let Hsin Ch'eng take away the money for the present. The Magistrate should detain the Tls. 5,000 that Hsin Ch'eng owes to Heng Yii, and let Wang Pao-shan take the rest. Do you think that plan feasible ? b. Why, yes, I could give instructions to the Magistrate to take that course. a. In that case, I will send you a despatch to that effect to-morrow, meanwhile I will take my leave, if you will allow me. b. Good-bye then till I next see you. a. Good-bye to you. b. Au revoir. PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-nUA. 115 No. 11 . My best congratulations to you. b. The same to yourself. a. Seeing, in the Peking Gazette yesterday, the news of your selection, I have come to-day to express my congratulations. b. I am much obliged to you for your trouble. Please take a seat. a. After you. b. Have you been much occupied with official business lately ? a. For some time, yes, I have had a great deal of business ; I have had no time to myself at all. b. What makes you so busy ? a. It is all the business connected with the Autumn Assize. b. Why, the Autumn Assize is nearly over, is it not ? a. Yes, at least it will be by the end of this month. b. Ah ! When will you be presented to the Commission of Scrutiny ? a. Probably on the tenth of this month. b. What sort of a post is it ? a. Well, it is a medium post. b. With your talents, Sir, it won't be long before you are transferred to the leading Magistracy. a. Oh, I don't venture to aspire to that. This is my first official appointment. I am quite contented to get an easy post and be saved from the fear of making some blunder. If it had been one of the laborious and difficult posts, I should feel I was not competent for the position and that I should excite general ridicule. b. Ah, you are too diffident, Sir. b. Then about what date is your departure ? a. Well, it will be about the first week or so of the llth moon, b. And how many days do they allow you ? a. The time allowed is three months properly, and if anything of importance happened I can apply for another month's leave. My own idea is that, if, when the time comes, there is nothing special, why I needn't apply for leave. b. Do you take your family with you on this occasion ? a. Well, 1 think travelling in the winter will be so very cold that there would be all sorts of inconveniences if I took my family, so I intend this year to go first to my post, and next 116 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HTTA. PART IV spring to send one of my household to come and meet my family, which will be more convenient. b. Yes, if you arrange that way, it will he better, no donbt. Well, I must be going off to the Yamen. We will have some more talk another day. a. Well, I shouldn't like to detain you long, as you have official engagements. After I have been presented to the Com- mission, I shall call at your house and make my compliments. b. You are really too good. Pray don't move. a. Please don't stop ; of course I must see you to the door. b. Pray go indoors, Sir. a. As soon as you are mounted, b. Thanks, many thanks. No. 12 a. How do you do ? I haven't seen you for a long time. b. Nor I you. My best wishes to you, Sir. a. And mine to you. b. I returned home the day before yesterday, saw the list of the successful candidates, and found you had passed, so I've come to-day on purpose to express my congratulations. a. Many thanks for your trouble. b. Not at all. a. Pray take the seat of honour. b. Please be seated, Sir. a. I hope that everything went very well on your journey. b. Thank you, yes, everything went smoothly. You have taken such a high place, Sir, on this occasion, that it is evident your scholarship is of the soundest. a. You flatter me ; it is a piece of good fortune only. b. You are too modest. Who was the Assistant Examiner this time ? a. It was the Hanlin Compiler Chang. b. Have you made all your calls ? a. Yes, yesterday I made my calls upon the Chief and Assistant Examiners. b. Your brother has quite failed to meet with his deserts this time. a. Not at all, Sir, indeed. b. Was he " sent up" ? PART TV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 117 a. Yes, his papers were sent np for approval ; it was his verse that ploughed him. b. A mere momentary check in his literary career ; he is sure to got his degree at the. next Provincial Examinations. a. I hope he may, thanks to your good auguries. b. What is the employment that has brought you to Peking on this occasion ? a. I am escorting a consignment of copper. b. Have you finished handing it over? a. Yes, I handed it over in full yesterday. b. Then on your return to the Provincial Capital, I suppose you will he able to take up your post. a. This year, on my return, I shall be able to hold some acting appointment, but probably it will be next year before I take up my post. b. Now, when are the Test Examinations ? a. On the 23rd of this month. b. Then after your Test Examination is over, we will have some more conversation ; and now I will bid you good-bye. a. Why not stay a little longer, Sir ? b. Well, to-day I have other calls to make. a. Then, when the Test Examination is over, I shall come and pay my respects to you. b. You are too good. Don't come out. a. Good-bye till we meet again. No. 13 . I have called upon you to-day, Sir, to ask you to do me a favour. b. Thank you. What can I do for you ? a. It is this. A fellow-countryman of mine is importing some ten or more chests of Ssu-chuan opium, and he has asked me to arrange as to paying the duties for him. / being quite at sea about it myself, I have come to beg you to manage this for me. b. When are the goods likely to arrive ? a. They will probably reach Peking the day after to-morrow. b. That's easily managed. a. Who can you get to manage it ? b. Has your friend from the country come to Peking ? 118 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV a. Yes, be arrived yesterday evening. He intends, as soon as he has made proper arrangements with regard to paying the duties, to leave the city and meet the goods. b. I see, yes. Well, I will go out of the city to-day and ask the good offices of the Commissioner of Customs' chief clerk, and get him to depute two men to go very early the day after to- morrow to your lodgings, and to accompany your friend from the country out of the city to meet the goods, and afterwards to go with the goods-carts in their charge to the Customs' Office. And will you tell your friend to make out an invoice beforehand and give it to me, to be handed in by me for verification on the same day. After it has been verified the opium will be stamped and released. And when the General Office has calculated the amount of duty, and let me know it, I will draw it from your friend from the country, and take it to the Commissioner of Customs. There will only be a little " rice-money " to be given to the under- strappers on duty, that's all. a. Oh, but my friend isn't afraid of spending a little extra cash, provided he can make sure of being fortunate enough to have no trouble. The plan you now propose is very satisfactory indeed. b. Pray let your friend from the country make himself perfectly easy ; as I undertake to manage the matter, I will guarantee absolute safety. a. You know, with my friend it is a case of " a burnt child fears the fire." b. How so ? a. Why, the year before last, he imported ten chests of Ssu- chuan drug. When they reached the Chang I Men, the city gates were closed, and he put up in an inn. The carters were seen unloading the opium from the carts by the city police, who laid an information against him for unlawfully unloading goods, and he was fined a considerable sum of money, so that he's very nervous this time ; and that is the reason of his asking me to make previous arrangements. b. Tell him to have no fear whatever ; there shall certainly be no mistake. a. Well, I am really very much obliged to you for your trouble. To-morrow I shall await news from yourself at my lodgings. b. Precisely. . 14 a* I have come to thank you for the honour of your visit the other day. b. Thank you, but you are really too punctilious, Sir. PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-BUA. 119 a. Not at all, I could do no less. b. How have your official duties been lately ? a. For the last few days they have been rather slacker. b. It is a case of " a capable man is always busy " with you, a. You are too complimentary indeed ; it is only " making up for dulncss by industry " with me, you know. b. You are too modest. a. I came to-day to bring you an invitation for the 5th, at the T'ung Ch'ing T'ang ; please don't decline, but let me have the honour of your company. b. Oh, why should you put yourself to so much trouble ; we have become so intimate at once, that such etiquette seems unnecessary. a. It is only a slight piece of attention on my part, meant to fulfil in some measure one's duties as a resident of the place. Besides, the other guests are all men of high character and principles, with whom I am on very good terms, and all meeting together for the sake of conversation. b. Well, since you are so exceedingly kind, I shall do as you bid me. a. Thank you, you will do me a distinguished honour ; then to-morrow I shall write you a note of invitation. b. Oh, but as we have spoken of it verbally there is no occasion to send a written invitation ; please tell me at what time, that's all. a. Well then, I will do as you say and not send the note, and we shall meet at the T'ung Ch'ing T'ang at 11 o'clock on the 5th. b. Yes, when the day comes, I shall not fail to be there in good time. a. Good. b. And there is something else, in which I wish to beg the honour of your assistance. a. In what way can I be at your service ? b. You see, this is my first visit to Peking, and I am a total stranger here. I want to hand in my statement of Particulars of Antecedents, but I have nowhere to procure an Official Sponsor. I shall be much obliged should you have any friends well known to yourself that are sending in Statements of Antecedents, if you could find a Sponsor for me. a. Why this is quite a coincidence. I have a friend, a chiijen, who, including this year's Metropolitan Examination) will have 120 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV been up for his Three Examinations, and he is just now intending to hand in his Statement of Antecedents and await employment. It will be just the thing for both of you to prepare a mutual Security. This gentleman will be one of those present at my party on the 5th, and you can talk over the thing with him personally then. b. Really, that is an extraordinary coincidence, and I shall rely on you entirely in the matter. a. Thank you, it will be my duty to do all that I can to serve you ; and now I must say good-bye until we meet on the utli. b. You are going home then ? a. Au revoir. No. 15 a. Let me introduce you two gentlemen, This is Chu Yu- yuan, this is Mr. Huang I-ch'en. b. I am delighted to make your acquaintance. c. The pleasure is mutual, Sir. b. Please take a seat, Sir. c. After you, Sir. b. I have often heard my friend here, Mr. Li Chih-hsien, speak of your wide and brilliant scholarship, and I have a great admiration for it. Our meeting to-day is a predestined event. c. Thank you. Mr. Chih-hsien is far too flattering to my slight capacity and scanty learning ; I feel really quite over- powered. b. You are too modest. May I ask, Sir, when you lost your father ? c. In the spring of this year. b. When your father was living, what had his appointments been? c. My father had been transferred from the Hanlin to a Cen- sorship, afterwards promoted to a Supervising Censorship, then, having gained a First Class at the Metropolitan Scrutiny, was selected for the appointment of Grain Intendant of Kuangtung ; last year he was promoted to be Financial Commissioner of Honan, and this spring, on the 5th of the 2nd moon, while in office as Financial Commissioner of Honan, he vacated his post ['.., he died]. b. What age was your father this year ? c. He was sixty-six. b. And what age is your mother ? AllT IV TI1K HI II>K TO Kl'AN-HUA. 121 c. My mother is just sixty. b. Is she still vigorous ? c. Thank you, yes, she is quite hale and hearty. b. You are serving in the Han Lin Yiian, are you not? c, Yes, after passing successfully at. Yes, whenever the Club meets, we go out the day before and come back when it's over. a. Where do you stay at the Hills? b. We stay in Uie same temple. a. Then how do you manage about food ? b. We take a cook from the city with us, and we buy our provisions in the city and take them with us too. Wine and meat you can also buy at a small market-place there. a. If the thing is like that, I should like to join this Club. b. If we can get you to go, it will be an additional distinction to the Club. a. You are too complimentary ; but I am not good at writing poetry ; I shall just go and rub the ink for you all, you know. b. You are too modest. a. And about the food, I will only go if I subscribe an equal share. b. Oh, as to that, you need not give yourself the slightest bother about it ; that will be for mo to see to. a. Unless we come to an arrangement, indeed I could not think of doing as you wish. b. If that is the way of it then we will mess together, each of us subscribing his share. a. Yes, on that understanding I will go. a. But who is the President of the Club ? b. We came to the conclusion to take it in turns to act as President. PAKT IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 125 . That's ti capital arrangement. b. Very well, on the 21st, in the morning, I'll invite you, and wo will all start together. a. So be it then. No. 18 From which district [ken] of your country do you come, Sir? b. I am a Nagasaki man. a. Oh, then you are close to Chinn. b. Yes, indeed, quite close. (i. How many years have you been in China ? b. Throe years. n. To speak kuan Jnia ns well as you do, after living three years in China, you must be exceptionally clever. I am much impressed by it. b. You are too complimentary. My knowledge is only a rough, general acquaintance, I don't pretend to have mastered it. a. I am not paying you a mere compliment when I say that there is not the slightest difference between your pronunciation and that of my own countrymen. I assure you, such intelligence as yours is rare. b. Oh, indeed, no. a. What position in the public service do you hold here ? b. I am now Interpreter here. a. Capital ! And in our respective positions there are con- stantly matters to be jointly managed, so when I'm at a loss I shall beg you for your advice. b. You are too good, but as this is my first appointment, I am quite unpractised, and it is from you I shall have to learn in everything. a. No, I assure you. However, by constant consultation together we shall both be mutually improved. b. Certainly, what you say is perfectly true. May I ask from what position you entered the service ? a. I was a graduate, and was drawn for this place. b. How many years is it since that ? a. I have only been here rather more than a year. b. What is your native place ? a. Chiang Hsia hsien in Hupei. b. Is your family with you ? 120 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. PART IV a. No, I have not brought my family with me, for my mother being aged could not have undergone the fatigue of a journey, and therefore did not come, so that I am here by myself. b. Yes, I see. I hear from our Consul that you have inspired general respect since your arrival, by your very sympathetic intercourse with the foreign officials. a. Not at all. At first I had no great experience in foreign matters, so having had the honour to be sent here by the High Authorities to assist in carrying on the duties of Mixed cases, I have simply treated bona-fide matters in a bomi-fide spirit, hoping sincerely that there should be no distrust on either side, but an unreserved mutual confidence, thus leading to mutual consideration ; that is what my motive has been. b. If, Sir, you always entertain these views, your public action will naturally be satisfactory. And as I have to make other visits to-day, I shall come again to your residence on some future occasion and do myself the honour of a personal interview. If you should be at leisure I trust you will come to my quarters for a little conversation. a. Since you do not think it beneath you, I shall certainly, after a day's interval, call upon you at your residence. b. Thank you ; then I shall await the honour of your visit there. a. You are very kind. Pray mount and go on your way. b. Pray don't come out. Many thanks to you. a. Au revoir. No. 19 n. I have called upon you to-day in order to beg you to be good enough to give me some assistance. b. Please tell ine what I can do for you. a. It is about the loan that my relative Ku Tzu-heng borrowed last spring from your friend Ch'in Pao-ch'en. He has dunned him lately for this sum, and the two have ha.d a misunderstanding and quarrelled. I hear now that Ch'in Pao-ch'en, means to take legal proceedings against rny relative, and knowing that there is an unbroken friendship between yourself and Ch'in Pao- ch'en, I have come to beg you to use your good offices to effect a reconciliation between them. b. Do you know if there was any intermediary at the time the money was borrowed ? a. Yes, I know there was an intermediary ; Hao Wn was his name ; he died last winter. b. How many taels did your relative borrow from Ch'in Pao- ch'en, and was there any interest ? TAUT IV THE GUIDE TO Kl AN-IH'A. , 127 a. My relative borrowed 'J(M) taels, and it was distinctly stated that interest would \n\ charged at the rate of 1^ candarins. 1 A promissory note was drawn up, in which it was provided that the amount should be repaid in two years. It is just a year and -half up to now, and two months ago Ch'in Pao-ch'en said to my relative that he wanted to purchase a house, and he was waiting for this money to use ; he didn't want the interest, but interest was to cease and the principal to be repaid. My relative said he shouldn't be able to repay the principal all at once, and Ch'in Pao-ch'en told him to do all in his power to raise the money, and after that they separated. A short time ago Ch'in Pao-ch'en went again to my relative's house and wanted repay- ment at once. My relative said it was really impossible to raise the money immediately, and that a few months must be allowed him to repay the whole amount, he continuing as before to pay interest monthly. But Ch'in Pao-Ch'en wouldn't consent to this, insisted on the repayment of the capital, and declined interest. Owing to this, they had an altercation and quarrelled violently. I now hear that Ch'in Pao-ch'en is going to take legal proceedings, My relative, for his part, owing to the time agreed upon not having arrived, cannot pay the capital sum. Moreover, he is not in arrears with his interest. As for going to law, that would be reasonable enough, but he having an official position, to do so would interfere with his duties. And so I thought I would beg your good offices to reconcile them, and get them not to carry the thing farther. Don't you approve of that ? b. How do you think I can reconcile them if I came forward ? a'. I would ask you to see Ch'in Pao-ch'en and suggest that the principal should be repaid for certain at the end of two months, interest being paid meanwhile by the month, and that if at the due date my relative is unable to repay the principal, I will be personally responsible myself. b. On that understanding, then, I will go and see Ch'in Pao-ch'en to-morrow and speak to him. . I am very much obliged to you. When the matter is settled, I shall bring my relative to thank you for your trouble. b. You are very good. No. 20 We have both of us come to-day, Sir, with the express intention of paying our respects to you. b. Thank you both for your trouble. Please sit down. a. After you, Sir. b. And how are you two gentlemen named ? 1 Equivalent to 18 per cent. 128 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-ilUA. PAliT IV a. My name is Tao, and his Ching. b. When did you reach here? re. We arrived yesterday. b. Where are you stopping? a. At the Te Yuan lun, in the eastern suburb. b. How many years have you spent, Sir, in our country ? a. I have been four years. /;. And this gentleman, how long ? a. He has been here only just half-a-year. b. Is he acquainted with our language ? a. He is not ; he has never learnt it. b. Have you gentlemen travelled here for pleasure or on official business ? a. Not on official business, for pleasure merely. b. What part of your country do you come from, Sir? a. I am an Osaka man. b. And this gentleman, is he from the same neighbourhood ? a. No, he is not, he is from Yokohama. b. Pray tell me, Sir, do you kuow a gentleman named Fu, of of the same place as yourself, who was formerly Interpreter at Shanghai ? a. Indeed I do ; our families have been friends Tor generations. b. What post has he now in your country ? a. He is not there at present. After his return to Japan, he was sent by Imperial orders to England. b. Oh, indeed ! a. Were you a friend of his, Sir ? b. Yes, we were great friends. . Where w r as it you knew him ? b. I knew him when I was a Deputy in Shanghai, where we contracted a literary friendship which became a very close and lasting one. Afterwards, when Mr. Interpreter Fu had returned home, and had reached Nagasaki, he sent me a letter. After that, when I had the honour to be sent on duty here in Chihli, we quite lost sight of each other. But now that I have heard from you that he has received an appointment in England, I will get a letter to him ready within the next day or two, which I will hand to you, Sir, and beg you, when a convenient opportunity occurs, to send to him in England. PART IV. THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. 129 a. Certainly. We shall he staying here a few days yet ; if you will write it at your convenience and despatch someone with it to our inn to give it to me to send. b. I must return you two gentlemen's visit at your lodging within the next day or so, a. Indeed we cannot permit that. Your duties are too numerous. Besides, your friendship with Mr. Interpreter Fa renders us still more intimate, so that such etiquette is scarcely required. b. It is indispensable. a. And now we must take leave. b. Thank you both for your visit. a. Not at all. Please don't come out. b. Well, I will do as you wish, and will not come far. a. Thank yon. Good-bye for the present. 18 130 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE. The Glossary appended to this translation follows Sir THOMAS WADE'S system of transliteration and tone-marks, adapted however, in the latter respect, by a modification designed to show at a glance the exact fall of the accent according to Pekinese pronunciation in each of the twenty-two hundred phrases inserted. At the risk of appearing to travel needlessly over well-worn ground, I propose to examine briefly the nature, of the Pekinese tones, both as they exist in their normal form, that is, in isolated words, and also as affected by contact with others in conventional combinations, under which conditions the all-important element of accent is developed and brought into play. The Pekinese tones have been treated of by Sir T. WADE in the Tzii $rh Chi,* and even more fully by Dr. EDKINS,| who has moreover described them in terms, and from the point of view, of a system of " natural tones." It will be convenient to summarise the main heads of EDKINS' observations on the subject at this stage. In the shang p'ing, the first of the four recognised Pekinese tones, he finds three forms ; (1) before another word in combination with it, it is an upper level tone moderate in length ; (2) if second in a com- bination of two, it is the upper falling tone, when accented ; and (3) if unaccented and in the same position, it drops to a low pitch and becomes level without being much prolonged. The hsia p'ing is heard as the upper quick rising intonation, which it keeps whether standing first or last, except when an unaccented final in a combination, in which case it becomes the same as the third form of the preceding tone. The shang sheng has the lower rising intonation pronounced with moderate quick- ness. This tone also when last and enclitic becomes the low level unaccented form of the shang p'ing. When two shang shengs occur together with the accent on the last, the first rises to the pitch of the hsia p'ing with which it becomes identical. Of the ch'u sheng there are, Dr. EDKINS considers, two intonations, one a compound tone or cir- cumflex, falling and rising again quickly, which is the accented variety and prefers the first place in a combination of two; the second, or unemphatic form, is a low quick falling tone, and is heard when standing * See that work, Colloquial Series, 2nd Edit., Part I, pp. 7-9, and Part VII, pp. 420-422. f See his Grammar of the Shanghai Dialect, 2nd Edit., pp. 6 et seyq. ; also his Mandarin Grammar, 2nd Edit., pp. 10 et seqq,; but especially China Review, Vol. V, pp. 140-142. TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE. 131 last in a combination. There is, besides, as in each of the three preceding tones, the same unaccented, low, level variety. Otherwise put, the unaccented word is heard with a low level intonation whatever its proper tone may be, if coming last. After an independent and careful examination of the* whole subject, made in Peking itself for the most part, and constantly checked and tested, I find my results agree in the main with Dr. EDKINS' conclusions, to which however I take certain exceptions to be presently specified. But before recurring to the tones, it will be convenient to consider the nature and effect of accent in this dialect. What is Accent? The word is thus derived and defined in the New English Dictionary of the Philological Society : " Accent, adopted 11 from French accent. Old French acent, extant representative of Latin " accent-urn, formed on ad to + cantus singing, a literal rendering of "Greek 7r/>o shang 3 huo or shang 2 huo, ||J ^ hsieh? farh or hsieh 2 farh. Others again are always normal, as If %& erh 3 to, j|J ^ chieh* chieh. Ditonics. 136 THE GUIDE TO KUAN-HUA. Unless pronounced slowly, the tones are hsia p'ing and shang sheng, and are so marked in the Glossary. Ex. M. see above, D. f\ $\ chiu 2 yang 3 , M Jt S 2 * Although there is a general agreement as to the fact of this modi- fication, it has not been quite unchallenged. On the one hand we have, amongst others, Dr. EDKINS, Sir T. WADE (partially) and Mr. GOH ; on the other, Mr. E. H. PARKER. It will be useful to examine the opinions expressed. I have quoted already Dr. EDKINS' statement, " When two shang " shengs occur together with the accent on the last, the first rises to the " pitch of hsia p'ing with which it becomes identical." Sir T. WADE (Tzu rh Chi, Colloquial Series, 2nd Edit., Vol. II. p. 422) observes, " Under the 3rd, [tone, viz., the shang sheng'] the change is more "remarkable: the first syllable is changed nearly, if not quite, to the "2nd tooe ; still there is a manifest limitation proper to particular "vowels." Mr. GOH affirms, in his Chinese introduction to the Kuan Hua Chih Nan, " Whenever in colloquial two connected shang sheng " words occur, the first must be read in the hsia p l ing, the second in the " shang sheng, as the saying runs ^ Jfc JJ^i j^jj feng shang pi tao, which " means (he adds in a note) when two shang sheng words meet, the tone " of one must be overthrown." Mr. PARKER, on the other hand, (China Review, Vol. VII, p. 183) considers such a rule to be too rigidly stated. He thinks the tonic modification described by EDKINS is " optional, unconscious and elastic ; " and a complete disregard of it in no way tends to make the speaker " less comprehensible than he otherwise would be." Further on he quotes a sentence from the " Hundred Lessons," where three successive shang sheng words occur, and points out, very truly, that it is immaterial whether each of them is separately clearly pronounced, or whether the first or the second is changed to a hsia p l ing. So far as the statements of the four writers really conflict, I agree with the majority, and the more readily as Mr. PARKER seems not to have fully appreciated one element in the question which is in fact essential. The modifications described by Dr. EDKINS apply strictly only to recognised and permanent combinations. Such combinations or compound words, formed by the union of two members in an intimate and lasting alliance, are altogether distinct from the mere accidental and momentary juxtaposition of syllables, such us those in the sentence Mr. PARKER quotes. It is only in the former case that the mutual action and reaction of the tones are afforded opportunity to have full play. Where no such dissyllabification has been developed, as it has not in the above instance, or in one adduced by Sir T. WADE,* the accent will be regulated entirely in accordance with temporary and varying conditions, with, in fact, the relative prominence given by the speaker * Ma lisiao "the horse is small," which is a complete sentence, not a com- pound word, TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE. 137 at his option to any one of the constituent and co-ordinate terms of the expression. Then, and only then, in my judgment, can this tonic modification be considered without system or significance. Before leaving this group it will not be out of place to glance at what seems to be the reason why the shang sheng when modified becomes a hsia p'ing rather than any other tone. Although in ditonics neither syllable is destitute of tone, in many, perhaps most cases, the accent preponderates on one rnther than the other. When therefore it falls on the latter syllable in a binomial of double shang shengs the effect is to strengthen the tone of this at the expense of the first, so that the length and comparative lowness of the more accented tone are unusually marked, in contrast with the forced compression and elevation of the other, which in thus becoming a high and short rising tone, has been simply converted into a hsia p'ing, or in other terms, has been transferred from the lower into the higher series, a change of constant occurrence in those dialects where a regular double series of tones exists. (12). Sluing sheng 4. ch'ii sheng. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M. JJ jj mai 3 mai, D. ^| $[!, man 3 ti 4 . Meta tonics are common in this group. (13). Ch'u sheng -f shang p'ing. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M. $ jnl ti 4 hsiung, D. ^ Jjjjb yung 4 hsin 1 . (14). Ch'tt sheng -f hsia p'ing. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M. ^ $r Vai 4 yanq, D. JpJ ]|jj hsiang 4 ch'ien 2 . (15). C/i'u sheng 4. shang sheng. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M. j|[ $ij ton 4 fu, D. g |U yao 4 chin 3 . ( 16). Double ch l u sheng. Ditonics, tones normal, but when the accent is thrown more strongly on the second word, as often happens, the latter, though in other revspects unaltered, rises in pitch. Owing to this, the voice is compelled to rise suddenly from the low level where the first word terminates, to the higher one at which the second commences, and thus, as Mr. PARKER has pointed out, " the ear detects a change " which produces an effect approximate to that of a shang sheng" though the similarity is only superficial. Ex. M. pai 4 k'o 4 . 138 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. GLOSSARY OF PHRASES SHOWING THE TONES AND ACCENT OF EACH PHRASE AS PRONOUNCED IN THE PEKINESE DIALECT. ai* nan? a* shih* an 1 cWan an* chao* an 1 chia 1 an 1 chih ari 1 hsin* an 1 k'ang* an 1 sliang an 1 tzu an* tzu at? yeTi* clia> ch'a? ch l ien ch'a- cttuarl ck'a 2 hsiin ch'a? hu? ch'a* t(4) ch l a- fiavli? ch'a 1 pieh* ch'd 1 sungW ch'a* tienM cfra 1 ts'oW ck'a 1 tzu ch'a- wan 3 cWa* wen ch'a* yeW ch'a- yen* to be unable, or impossible, to to matter, be of harm saddle and saddle-cloth according to, in accordance with to give, or to serve, as alimony to one's family to put in position, III, 9. To establish one (in business) II, 9 free from anxiety, quiet, I, 7. Deliberately in good health to fix on, or together a saddle a table, work-bench to work at night to officially instruct a teapoy " Tea-money," a fee on taking a house a saucer to investigate, examine judicially a tea-pot surprised a tea-tray difference, distinction to intervene in legal proceedings to check, go through, examine a mistake, miscalculation a fork a tea-cup to examine, interrogate tea to inspect, verify IV, 7 III, 13 III, 16 IV, 5 III, 20 11,27 IV, 3 II, H III, 16 II. 14 I, 39 IV, 6 III, II, III, IV, III, II, 33 III, 2 IV, 18 IV, 10 11,21 IV, 13 III, 4 III, 2 IV, 5 I, 9 IV, 13 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. chai 1 kei chai" werh- fcai i } shih chan* cfcit'W chau* fang" chati 1 kuang 1 chan 1 UenW chari* pu chan 1 tzu 1 ch'eng * fang- chang* fang- t hang 3 j ou* chang 1 inn c/iang 3 tent/ 1 chany* tzfi cttang- chiu ch'ang* /wi* ch'ang- hung ch'ang 2 yii chao- chi~ chao*fu- rhao* huK 4 ) rhao* Wan chao* li* chao- liany- fhao* pan* chad- pit fliau 1 ting* chao 1 tsu 1 chao* tzu chao* yangrh* chao* ying ch'ao 1 fan ch'ao 1 hsiehW eh'ao* nao ch'ao 3 nao* che* chiaitg che-fn to lend (money) temporarily to II r 21 a mansion, large establishment II, 37 to tear open II, 36 official duties I, 34 temporarily IV, 6 a warehouse, godown II, 2 to receive benefit or profit from (a man) IV, 9 to append II, 19 a duster III, 4 felt, also foreign woollen materials III, 5 regulations IV, 6 a counting-house, accountant's office III, 8 a tent III, 8 to put on tiesh in, 16 accounts II, 19 to light the lamps II, 29 curtains III, 9 enduring, permanent II, 23 (of actors) to act, give a performance III, 11 a labourer, etc., permanently employed II, 12 good [or] clever, at IV, 17 excited, disturbed II, 22 to reply officially (on equal terms) IV, 6 to address officially (on equal terms) IV, 1 to look after, attend to III, 8 legally IV, 6 to get a chill I, 5 to take action as requested IV, 7 to h'nd a way to make it up to one II, 7 to seek employment II, 17 to make a full confession II, 38 to Let II, 1 a shade, cover (tyir I, 18 ^5 ready-made clothes H 35 ^ to hold oneself responsible H> 13 ^1 to make a name IV, 16 _fc to mount (a horse) IV, 18 fto hand in, deliver IV, 1 to be" obliged for (your) kind inquiries IV, 2 tupon proceeding to, as soon as IV, 6 to deposit at II, 15 "p to bear in mind, take note of II, 39 |4 memory HI, 15 fH to devise IV, 9 ^ since, as H 5 16 |^f fowl (as food) HI, 4 g secret I. 16 ft .saorindal vessels H, 40 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 141 chi* shihW Mi 4 t*ai chi* tziirh* chi* yen- chi* yen ' ch'i 1 chW cli'i- chieh ch ( i 3 cJi'u 1 ch'i" chung 1 ch'i 4 chung* ch'i'fu* ch'i* hou* c/i'i 1 listen'* ch'i 3 huo* ch'i"jen cJi'i* kan 3 ch'i 3 lai ch'i* ma 3 ch'i^nei* ' ch'i*se ch'i 1 shang cm- shih* cliia 1 vh'ien* chia * ch'ien chia* chili cliia 1 chii cilia ' chiian cliia 1 hao chia, 1 liuo ctiia 1 li pet at what time chicken broth inserted in, mentioned in an egg auspicious words, good auguries to give up smoking opium to make tea to assemble, meet together in full readiness at first in this, therein IV, 11 III, 4 1,19 III, 8 IV, 12 11,25 11,29 IV, 8 III, 20 11,23 IV, 7 to highly appreciate or value(a man's services) II, 5 to remove the official seals to go out of mourning (of friendship) close and lasting to disdain to take delivery of goods a Bannerinan you are very good ! to rise to ride a horse therein, included ready prepared one's looks, appearance (of tea) to make it to start on a journey to impose on one's ignorance as a matter of fact, the truth is sycee shears a price a price fittings of a house one's wife to cangue utensils with all possible (care, zeal, etc.) a member of one's household to cut open with shears in the house, at home my mother twice as much 11,22 IV, 16 IV, 20 IV, 18 IV, 8 11,24 II, 1 1,26 III, 16 II, 9 IV, 17 I, 5 III, 2 II, 3 11,24 11,33 11,36 III, 3 II, II, II, II, III, IV, 11,22 11,36 II, 3 IV, 15 1,21 142 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. cliia" 1 pel* chia 2 pi 3 cliia ' shih 4 chia ' ssu ' chia z tzu 3 chia 4 tzu chin 1 yin 1 chiang 3 chiu chiang 1 hsi chiang* lai" 2 chiang ' su chiang 4 tzu chiang 3 yu(2) ckiang 4 yu- ch'iang- ch'iang 3 ling * ch'iang 3 liu- ch'iang l tiao chiao s cha (4) chiao 1 cJii* chiao l ch'ing chiao 1 cluing 1 chiao* cluing chiao 1 fa chiao 3 hsia(*) chiao 1 hsieh { ch iao 3 hsing ' chiao 1 huan- chiao 1 huarh 1 chiao 1 huo 4 chiao 4 Vai 1 chiao 1 kei chiao 1 kei chiao 1 nun chiao ' she chiao * shou chiao l tai chiao ' tzu chiao* tzju. chiao ! wang a double coverlet for example, for instance domestic affairs private effects year of one's birth a frame, stand " glad tidings," news from you neat, tasteful province of Kiangsi in future to explain the text province of Kiangsu paste to praise soy vigorous, robust ^ f rce > compel to detain b y force accent dishonest on occasions of intercourse intimacy to hand over in full stubborn wav or system of teaching the present moment to give over charge a pi ece ^ god fortune to hand back to water flowers to deliver goods to call to one to open a door to hand or give over to to show how fragile international, " mixed " (cases, etc.) scaffolding * ^ ano - over * a bit (for horses) a sedan chair dealings, transactions, with ill, 17 II, 39 IV, 16 IV, 9 I, 3 III, 3 IV, 13 1, 30 II, 24 II, 17 1, 30 II, 21 III, 14 IV, III, IV, IV, 4 4 1 6 IV 2 I, 17 II, 32 IV, 18 I, 9 IV, 7 III, 15 I, 30 II, 1 II, 3 II, 5 II, 22 IH 18 Hf 19 II, 29 I, 19 III, 10 III, 18 IV, 4 III, 14 ^^' ^ III, 16 III, 8 IV, 9 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 143 ch'iao* ch'iao 2 ping* chieh* ch'P chieh 3 chieh chieh 1 chien* chieh* ch'ien* ckuW chiieh 1 chieh 1 fang chieh* i* chwh* kei chieh 3 mei chieh 4 mo chieh* pan* chieh 1 shang chieh* shao* chieh* shih? chieh 2 shou 3 chieh 1 shu* chieh* t'ung* chieh* tzZrh* chieh* tzW chieh* yueh 1 chieh* yung* ch'ieh* shih z chien 3 cheng chien* chiao* chien 1 ch'ing 3 chien* chutf) chien* cliuang* chien* chiian* chien 3 cWi chien 3 fa chien 3 fang* chien* Jisin* chien* hsing* chien* kei chien 1 ku chien* knai* cliien 1 kuan 3 chien 1 lin* chien 3 man* JTjfj good bargains to see patients at the due date an elder sister to receive (a visitor) * ^ rrow naoney to break ^ relations or intimacy with a neighbour tne slightest anxiety or thought sisters mustard * procure, raise, (money) in the street ^ ^ e ne ' s introducer when the time comes to make water to take over charge to escort a consignment of copper a promissory note * ma ^ e an excuse a promissory note to borrow for one's needs trustworthy, exact a witness (your) instructions, wishes, desires to press one to a person to recommend one hale and hearty to send up a candidate's examination papers for the approval of the Chief Examiner IV, 12 an easy post II, 3 to select by lot for a post IV, 18 to select for appointment IV, 15 a letter of recommendation II, 24 my surname I, 1 to recommend III, 20 strong, substantial II, 10 to think strange, to mind IV, 1 to administer in addition to one's proper duties IV, 2 miserly, stingy II, 31 unceremonious, cavalier IV, I II, 9 II, 87 IV, 10 II, 17 IV, 5 IT, 17 II, 15 IV, 17 Ir 9 II, 17 III, 4 IV, 7 11,27 I, 10 IV, 14 III, 16 II, 5 IV, 12 IV, 10 IV, 8 II, 31 IV, II, 8 II, 32 IV, 13 IV, 6 II, 10 IV, 15 144 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. chien* shurhW chien 4 t'ien 1 chien* yu* ch'ien* an 1 ch'ien 1 ch'iu ch'ieri 1 hang cli'iev? htm* ch'ien* k'uan 9 ch'ieri 1 Hang cfrien? mi 3 cli'-ien* nien ch'ieri 2 p'u* she ch'ieri 1 shih ch'ieri 2 shurh(V ch'ieri 2 t'ien ch'ieri 2 t'ou ch'ieri 2 ts'atf ch'ien 1 tzu ch'ieri 2 tztt ch'ieri 2 tz'u* ch'ieri 1 wan ch'ien? yungM chih' 2 ' chao chili* ch'i chili 1 ch'ih chili 1 chou 3 chih* ho 4 chih 1 hsicn* chih 1 hui chih 2 i* chih 1 Ttei chih* kuan* chih z li chili 1 ming chili 3 tiling 1 chih 1 shang TT the number of articles ^ ?C every day >Q 1^ to signify (your) wishes yC ~K indisposed, unwell ^ ^t (your or his) birthday H? \\ a cash-bank 05 % first and last fltl H tne former incumbent H(J (3 the day before yesterday "5 Wt a sum owed, indebtedness $1? ^ the land-tax H? $fc money and food BFJ $ the year before last $| $jji a cash-bank $ $& to introduce, import, bring forward (into a discussion) g^ >^C a stumble (of horses) g^l ^ the number of copper cash gy ^C the day before yesterday fj gfl in front money slips of wood, labels pincers the last [orj a previous, occasion (also ch'ieti,* nan, C 4 )), on no account money for an outlay a warrant, written authority resolution, strength of will to manage to struggle along (or c/t'e 4 chou 3 ), hampered, embarrassed to convey congratulations a District Magistrate to officially inform, notify resolved, bent upon to advance (wages, etc.) can only, the only thing is to {also tzu- k'o* and tzH* k'o 3 } II, 34 just, merely, (also tzQ* huan*) IV, 4 province of Chihli IV, 20 a visiting card III, 18 by name, specifically IV, 5 to prop up, stretch upon III, 9 flj jfl M III, H II, 14 IV, 5 1,10 1,32 II, 9 11,18 IT, 5 IV, 9 IV, 10 11,22 11,31 I, 18 II, 9 IV, 9 in, IG III, 12 1,19 11,29 IV, 9 III, 14, 17 III, 9 IV, 8 1,16 II, 8 III, 20 II, 25 II, 23 II, 24 1,32 II, 5 IV, 7 IV, 15 III, 13 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES, 145 chih 1 shih chili 1 tao chih* tsui* chih*tu chih*wang(V chih- yau* chili* yii chWfan* ch^ih* ling* cWih* p'ing* ch'ih* shih ch'ih* ts'un ch'ih* tzu ch-'th 1 yen 1 chin* ch'eng- chiii 3 chi 2 chin 1 chih* chin* ching 1 chin 1 chit'h chin* ch l u chin* hsiieh* chin* i* chin* chin* lai* chin* li* chin 1 nien chin* shetig 3 chin * shih chin 1 tzu chin 3 tzu chin 3 yao* chin* yeh* ch'in 1 ch'ai ch'in 1 ch l i chWp'ei* ch'in* shen } ch'in 1 tzu ch'in ' yu (3) ching 1 ch'a* 20 # solitary, quite alone IV, 18 to indicate, instruct as to IV, 4 (also chili 1 tao*) to know I 6 to punish H) 35 social system, state of society IV, 4 hope, aspiration IV, 11 provided that (also tzu- yao*) II, 24 to go and (do some prejudicial act), I, 16, II, 13 to go so far as to to eat, take food HI, * to give official orders to IV, 6 guided by justice, impartially IV, 1 provisions, eatables III, 8 measurement, dimensions II > 7 a spoon HI, ^ to smoke opium H 25 to go into the city H, 18 urgent, hurried IV, 3 one's present post or rank II, 5 to go into Peking H 17 just (enough, etc.), neither too nor too III, 3 to go in, enter II 8 to take a Licentiate's Degree IV, 1C progress, advance, improvement I, 30 to-day IV, 4 to go into the Palace II, 39 lately 1, 16 with all one's power IV, 5 this year I, 2 to go into the provincial capital II, 4 a Metropolitan Graduate IV, 2 gold II, 28 to do nothing but , to be for ever I, 37 important, urgent IV, 1 to present oneself to, pay a visit to IV, 16 an Envoy, an Imperial Commissioner IV, 1 a relative of another name II, 1 to respect deeply IV, 18 in person H, 18 personally II 12 relatives and friends Hi H the Metropolitan Scrutiny IV, 15 146 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. ching * ch'eng ching *- chi ching 3 chih ching 1 hsia* ching* i* ching * kuan ching * kit an (3) ching * kuan 3 ching 1 k'ung 3 ching* mi 3 ching * pao ' ching * shen ching * tzu ch'ing 3 an, 1 ch'ing 3 chiao ch'ing 3 chien * ch'ing 2 chih 3 ch'ing 1 ch'u ch'ing * chung 4 ch'ing* feng* ch'ing* hticn ch'ing - hsing ClL IW>(J L \*x ch'ing 3 k'o* ch'ing 3 shang* ch'ing* sheng ch'ing* shih* ch'ingtshih* ch'ing* tan ch'ing* tan* ch'ing* tsaoW ch'ing 3 tso* ch'ing 3 men* ch'ing- yiian* chiu 3 cheng chiu 3 cli'ien chiu* ching (sic) chiu* chu chiu 3 hsing* chiu- i(3) a Chief Clerk IV, 13 a salesman II, 12 scenery I, 20 frightened, scared II, 28 respect for, mark of respect I. 9 Peking officials I, 35 to manage, deal with IV, 7 just, simply III, 15 (also ching* k'ung ( 3 )), to startle II, 28 upland rice III, 7 the Peking Gazette IV, 11 spirits, energy II, 25 to be always , to do nothing but II, 33 to present one's compliments I, 3 May I ask, 1, 1 (also, ch'ing 3 chiao ') IV, 10 to ask to see, or, for an interview IV, 5 to request the issue of a Decree II, 22 distinct, clear I, 15 degree of gravity or importance IV, 5 the cool breeze II, 22 elegant leisure II, 21 circumstances, state of affairs IV, 5 feeling, sentiment I, 9 to invite guests III, 11 please take the place of honour II, 4 better, not so severe (of an illness) I, 7 as a matter of fact, the truth is IV, 9 to request instructions IV, 6 (of food), plain, without dressing III, 11 a detailed list, an Invoice, etc. IV, 13 very early in the day III, 12 please take a seat II, 4 please proceed IV, 11 may I ask I, 3 willing IV, 9 the 9 divisions of the Tartar city Peking III, 12 wine-money, apmwboire III, 6 after all I, 13 to catch hold of with the hand II, 32 (of wine) exhilaration III, 2 long since IV, 1 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 147 chiu'jih 4 chiu*liu* chiu 3 pei 1 chiu 3 p'ei* chiu 4 ping ' chiu* shourh 3 chiu* sui* chiu 3 tsuan ' chiu 4 tzti chiu 3 wei* chiu' 2 yang 3 chiu 3 yen- ch'iu 1 shen 3 ch'iu 1 shew* ch'iu 1 t'ien cho 2 lo cho 2 pi 3 cho 1 tzu cho 2 tzti ch'o l tzu chou 1 ch'e 1 cJiou 1 cheng chou } chih 1 chou 1 chou* Jisieti 4 c?tou } hsiian chou* mei* ch'ou* Vi ch'ou 2 tzu cliu* ai* chu* cha 2 chu 2 chiang 3 chu* chih chu 2 ching* chu 1 chu chu 4 fang 2 chu 3 fu chu 4 hsia chu*i former days II, 81 to detain long IV, 11 a wine-glass III, 4 to stay long with IV, 8 an old complaint II, 24 while about it III, 2 f]H the old year II, 40 $|| a corkscrew III, 7 ^ a wife's brother II, 10 ^ jfl I am delighted to meet you again (and I, 4 chiu 3 we-* 1 ) ^ jjj] I am delighted to make your acquaintance I, 1 X &i to delay, loiter IV, 3 ^^ iff ^ e autumn assize IV, 11 $t 45C the autumn harvest 11,11 5^ autumn II, 22 j^r a settlement, termination IV, 7 tilti ilj suppose for the sake of argument (or cho ' pi 3 ) II, 1 1 fij! ^ a table I, 18 i|j -? a bangle, bracelet II, 36 ffj^ Jp a stamp, die II, 34 carriage by land and water IV, 18 proper, correct III, 5 to be perfectly informed IV, 4 enough to go round, adequate II, 9 Department and District Magistrates IV, 5 to pass the dishes to IV, 1 to frown III, 2 a drawer III, 3- silkstuffs III, 10 to impede, obstruct IV, 6 stationed, resident, at IV, 1 to have one's private residence II, 8 a Lecturer IV, 16 an address IV, 7 a path through a bamboo-grove I, 20 a spider III, 14 a dwelling-house II, 11 to get, or, ask one to II, 30 to stop, lodge at II, 15 notion$ idea, plan II, 17 to stop at an inn III, 8 148 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. chu l to l chu*tzu ch'u 1 ch'eng* ch'u 1 chien ch'u* ch'u ch'u 1 ch'iieh 1 ch'u 2 fang ch ( u l kai 3 ch'u 1 hsi 1 ch'u l lai ch'u 1 ma 3 ch'u 1 men 2 ch'u 1 ming 2 ch'u ' sMn, chWshih* ch'u l shou 4 ch'u* so 3 ch'u 1 t'ou* ch'u l tsu l ch'u 9 tzu ch'u l tz'u ch'u 1 wai 4 chii 1 c/tang Chechia 1 chii- chien chu l li 3 chu l t'ing* chu- tzu ch'ii 3 cJi'ien* ch'u 3 chung* ch'ii 1 hsin 1 chWjtn* ch'u* nien chWshih* chuai 3 wo chuan, 4 chang ' chuan 1 ch'eng* a number of, numerous IV, 11 a pillar III, 10 to go out of the city II, 11 the first part of a month IV, 8 ^ go out 1, 25 to die in office IV, 15 a kitchen III, 9 to put to sea II* 30 (of children) usefulness . 1, 33 to relieve nature II, 29 to come out I][ 4 to visit Patients II, 2 to go out of doors I, 10 to become celebrated II, 37 mode of entering the public service IV, 15 to administer affairs IV, 1 to dispose of by sale IV, 8 a spot, locality, place IV, 6 to hoe II, 11 to come forward, appear (in a matter) IV, 19 to let II, 1 a cook II, 20 the first occasion IV, 18 to go abroad, leave home II, 15 to be the eldest I, 3 the entire family IV, 16 to recommend U 10 to assemble, make a party IV, 14 a Provincial Graduate H> 5 to stand on ceremony I 8 a patron Hi 24 a workroom, factory H> 7 to fetch money, to cash H> 26 to obtain one's degree IV, 12 rascality JI 16 to leave one's post IV, 15 last year H> 16 to die IV, 19 a hole or rut in the road HI? 6 profits, makings H 27 with the express intention, expressly for IV, 20 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 149 chuan 4 ch'ien* chuan* chih* r//ita>i 3 ch'ih 4 chuan* mai 4 chuan* wa 3 ch'uan 2 an 4 ch'uan 2 chia 4 eh'uan* chih rh'uan* chih 3 cttuan* hsiin* ck'uan* hu 4 ch'uan 2 pang l Chilian ' shang ch'uan* to* ch'uan 1 t l u 3 chuan 3 shang ch'uan 4 k'ai cli'iiari* chuang l chia chuang 1 chia 3 clmang* huai { clmang l shang chuang ' tsai 4 chuang } tso chuang l tzu ch'uang 1 hu chiieh- chiao } chileli- ting 3 ch'iieti 1 fen ch'ueh* tsun* cliui 1 shang ch'ui- tzu chun* cfiien* ch'un 1 ch'iu 1 ch'un 1 hsin 1 ch'un l lien* t'ien *e m 11,19 IV, 7 IV, 5 II, 19 II, 10 IV, 8 III, 20 IV, 3 11,39 IV, 6 III, 20 IV, 10 IV, 6 IV, 6 to make money or, a profit to transmit the information to to transmit orders to to resell bricks and tiles to summon to a Court passage-money shipping, boats to issue a Decree the master of a ship passage-expenses to summon and examine the master of a native vessel the side, or beam, of a vessel (of clothes) to put on ; to run or pass III, 5, 10 something with a hole or opening, over a stick, string, etc. a rudder IV, 6 Szechuen opium IV, 13 to roll up III, 17 to intervene between II, 32 a modification to meet the circumstances or IV, 9 exigencies crops II, 10 to make pretence IV, 1 to injure by collision IV, 6 to load on or into IV, 7 to load or be loaded with IV, 7 to pretend II, 30 a post III, 16 a window I, 23 to break off an intimacy, or relations II, 25 exceptionally, pre-eminently IV, 18 class or sort of post IV, II to conform scrupulously, strictly, to IV, 5 to catch, catch up, recover (a runaway) II, 32 a hammer III, 9 shall meet II, l spring and autumn, (but of the Classic) sexual passion New year scrolls Springtime ch'iu as title I, 27 1,44 11,40 11,16 150 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. chiln* fan 1 ch'iin 2 chW chung* chiu 9 chung * ck'tiek chung } fan* chung ! hou (4) chung ' jtn chung* j&n* chung 1 1 chung * ping * chung l fang chung* ti* H chung* yung* (sic) *|* ch'ung 2 lo ||f ch'ung * shut'h 4 ^ l-vr* 6n*ti*n H fang* fixing- fang* niu'- fang ' pirn fang-skill* fang-tung* fang"tzu fang* yang- fi'l* Jisin* fei* ICK fen 1 I'hia 1 /*'/ fen\fu fen 1 ltd fen* liang fen*tzu feng* ch'eng feng* eking (3) feng^ho- fcng* hwo* feng* Ken* feng* kuan 1 feng* tnan 3 feng* in ing* feng ' xheng feng ' shou ' feng 1 tuny* feng* wei' A feng 1 ivcn- feng* yin* feng* yin z fu* ch'i /?* 2 chieri fu* ch'in fu* ch'ing* for example, supposing, as if II, 1 to be at case about, make oneV mind easy I, 19 to release IV, 7 to tend cattle II, 11 convenient I, 14 an assistant examiner IV, 12 the landlord of a house II, 1 a prescription II, 25 a house II, 10 to tend sheep II, 11 thank you for your trouble I, 32 a useless or worthless thing III, 10 to set up a separate establishment II, 11 mode of dividing II, 11 to instruct, order II, 19 to give a share to II, 27 weight III, 19 to distinguish, a distinction I, 12 powder III, 6 to flatter IV, 18 to receive a Decree IV, 5 to have the honour to acquaint IV, 4 the scene I, 21 (of rivers) to freeze up II, 23 to tender for articles at a pawnbroker's II, 20 to beg, entreat IV, 13 officially appointed II, 12 expiry of an official appointment II, 5 to be honoured by orders IV, 20 reputation, rumours II, 16 an abundant harvest II, 11 to take the liberty to scud or present III, 18 manners and customs IV, 4 to be deputed IV, 16 to hear reports of IV, 4 to close (for the New Year) II, 4 salary II, 39 prosperity I, 2 province of Fuhkien II, 21 a father II, 17 to pay over in full IV, 7 152 GUIfcE TO KUAN HUA. fu^jen fa*knr fu* pang 3 Jfrj*' fa* sha-ng (*) fu- shih fu-shih* fu- yiiarh- kal* hsiu 1 hai 3 kuait hai* pa* ft a I- tzti kail 3 chirn han-hu. han ' f'arh ' liang - chan ' hang- cluing hang- hua hang- shih hao 3 ch'u hao 3 haoi'k* 7uio 3 Van* ?iao 3 s?iik* hao z shou ( 3 ) hao 3 shuo 1 hao- sstt 3 Jtao* tai 3 hao- tarh () hao 3 tsai* (sic) 'i 1 hsiu (polite) a wife I, 10 wealthy II. 23 a Proximo Access! t IV, 15 auspicious influence IV, 3 your residence I. 1 to wait, attend, upon 111, 5 the Test Examinations IV, 12 the Governor of a province II, 5 bran III, 16 to remain over and above, surplus IV, 10 to look oneself again I, 5 a seagoing ship II, 29 bashful, modest 1, 44 the Maritime Customs 1 V, 7 to be frightened II, 16 a child I, 33 marine delicacies III, 10 rarely seen, exceptional IV, 18 to inform by note IV, 7 to reply by note IV, 7 indistinct, I. 15, scamped II? 10 by land H,28 a sunshade, umbrella III, 17 a shirt HI, 5 house of business, mercantile house IV, 7 market-rates II, % head of a firm 1 V, 8 technical terms, " shop " II, 40 market-rates II, - advantages, good points, merits properly, thoroughly I, 6 (also, hao 3 &'a/0, goodlooking, beautiful I, 21 a good, charitable, or philanthropic, act II, 29 a good hand at III, 6 thank you for saying so ! I 9 a peaceful or honourable death II, 16 (also, hao- tai( 3 )), good and evil I, 29 a mortal illness HI, 13 it is a good thing that 11.39 a rat I, 43 nightfall 11.13 GLOSSAttY <)K In- i* foil '(sic) - //.<> ' />ii c cliuny : I) ho'- fung ' /to- //o :> ho- hx'i *. Iff' I* 4 , A* Int- j ti- ll o- A'M 7/U- '////A ho- pi* ho" p 1 - Ing ho-po- ho" shang ho" shang ho'- f nni i ho- t:u hou ' ch'eiif/ hou, 4 hsiian ' A-OM 4 mien how* nien hou* yen* 7m 1 ch'eng black colour, blacking III, 15 black pulse NM; to drink tea II, 4 to drink wine I 18 to eat gruel or porridge HI, 7 a spirit of fairness l v 1 what objection is there to IV, 1 friendly relations IV, 1 a formal reconciliation II, 19 to congratulate IV, 2 to exclaim at, shout out tit II, 39 suitable II, 24 how, in what manner IV, 5 how. of what sort IV, 9 what is the use of 1,42 amity, friendly relations II, 11 province of Honan I, 1 a pouch, purse III, 5 what need is there to (also Air pi*) III, 18 kind 11,24 a Harbour or River Inspector IV, 6 a Buddhist priest I, 31 to fit on III, 10 suitable, suited to 11,2 an agreement II, 10 a small box II, 7 to wait while you mount IV, - to be an Expectant II, 9 afterwards II, 6 behind, at the back IV, 6 the year before last IV, 16 to be an Expectant II, 3 behind I, 22 to await inspection IV, 7 the Western city in Peking II, 10 a habit, way, characteristic III, 19 careful I, 30 to like, be fond of I, 20 to closely examine I, 12 pewter III, 2 in pieces, to piece* 1. 43 TflB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. /wfi 2 lien 3 fix! 1 j)ri a hsi ' pierh 7m ' shan ' hsi- tsao 3 hsia* chieH, hs'ta* ch'iai* 4 ' /m'# 4 ch'uan IIXIH-* huar hs'm 4 AMI As'/. ' pao 3 httia hsla* shetig 4 hsla-shih- hsia* t'ien hsiu* tsou* hs'm 1 t:u fata* tzu /i.v/'a 1 yii- hsia ' yii 3 hs'mng ten' hsiang* eftin lisiang* fang hsiang* hao 3 hs'iang* hsi hsiang* hsia /isiang 1 fain* hsiang * hul ' to wash the face north-west the western side the Western Hills a theatrical stage to wash to aim at, with a view to an actor mean, base, wretched a debit balance, balance unpaid to go down to disembark the feelings, sentiments next time to startle out of sleep a place to go to, or be found at dried shrimps to deposit security to go down the hill to put down into [or] on the remainder leisure to sleep, pass the night, at summer to go blundering along a blind man a small case or box next time remaining over, surplus to rain next month chess to get on, come to the front a fellow-countryman the side buildings of a house to correspond, tally, to on good terms, friendly in detail, fully the country confidence, good faith to meet II, 29 11,31 III, 1 III, 8 III, 11 III, 8 IV, 9 III, 11 1,34 IV, 7 II, 19 11,21 IV, 16 11,26 II, 25 11,32 III, 19 II, 13 1,31 III, 10 II, 1 IV, 18 IV, 17 II, 12 11,29 III, 15 III, 18 IV, 12 II. 1 1,23 ii, u II, 4U 1,34 11,31 III, U IV, 8 I, 3 IV, 4 III, 13 IV, 18 IV, 1 155 lisiang* /-a/* 1 hsiang * I'ung hsiang * lai- hxiang* liang hxiang- pao* ftsiang* shang hxiatnj ' *7t//t ' hsiang* ski// * Ji Kiting 1 fan hsiang 1 tang* hailing* te~ *BT tas hsiang* htiao 3 <7r-'e/7tO) hx'mo- ch'HW hxifn> :t Jtan* ksiao 3 hsiii hxiao' 1 hua* hisiao* huaih hsiao 4 lao" hsiao* t'hiff hsich-chuan* '-''* fai-h faiek ' // hxieh* Jut in* /wit 1 JtsieJi* pu* h(eh 3 t:ft* hsien* ch'eiig- hsien'oh'iW hsien* cJt'ien" h#ien* chih? hsien 1 fu* hsien 1 jung* hsien- k'ungrk* listen* to concern, alt'ect a boy actor hitherto resonant, clear to report to a Superior to put on a border the provincial examinations the right or proper thing local dialect suited to, suitable to take a liking to, congenial a box, case towards the light " extras," small dishes not in the menu mean, grasping my Firm careful (also, JutueJt- Awa 1 ), to learn language a joke, good stury to be of [or] do a, service to one (of work), slack, easy to take one's wife with one to rest oneself mode of writing to reward (as for recovery of a lost article) to write a letter a little, some slight to divulge, let out to return (your) call to write in hand, in store, available beforehand a limit of time, fixed period cash a distinguished appointment my late father to speak ii. ; in, 11 II, 2 1.15 IV, 6 III, 14 IV, 12 II, 4 1,17 11,21 11,25 I, 4 III, 1 III, 11 11,27 I, 3 in, a IV, 20 11,33 1,40 IV, 14 IV, 11 11,38 III, 12 II, 6 IV, 6 IV, 1 1, 1G I, 4 1,30 II, 22 IV, 4 11,22 II, 10 IV, 2 IV, 15 to arrange the preliminaries for an interview IV, 16 spare time 1, 10 to admire . I 19 unabashed 1, 37 hien* zheng Sir (to non-officials) I, 2 156 THE Gl'IDE TO KUAN II U A. skik* Justin* shih- h&ien* shu* kx ten* fan' 2 hsien 2 tsai listen* tsai* ts'ai* in 1 farh- 7m 3 lisin ' jen ' Jtsin* kfou* hsln 1 k'u hsing* k'uei 7m' ling 3 ky in 1 shourk 3 h* hi 1 wen- htj- c/il It sing 3 chung kg ing- i l hsing-li fusing - tsot( :t lishig^tzu lising- wen" lisiu^shih hsiu* ts'ai ksiw* ts'an hsiung 1 lieng hsiung ' skov things that do not concern one at the present time a District Magistracy to chat, talk at leisure now salted vegetables lately annoyances, vexations a Happy New Year one's new post newly opened (to speak) recklessly, without restraint to put one to trouble luckily to decline with thanks a new hand newg etiquette, formality time of starting an Alarum Law Secretary (in a Yainen) to practise medicine Jtsiung* t'ai rise and fall, growth and decline to be fortunate enough to to do duty, be employed at, II, 1 ; to proceed temper to send a despatch expense of repairs (of circumstances), straitened to put in order, prepare a Licentiate confused, abashed a sleeve desperate, truculent a homicide, murderer a younger brother ; used to one of same generation = I. you Sir. (used to an equal of the same II. 3 generation) a long time IV, 5 1,43 II, 13 IV, 8 II, 31 II, 9 I, 40 III, 4 II, 3 I, 3D II, ^ II, 3 II, 2 IV, 5 II, 14 11,28 IV, 2 III, 20 IV, 3 IV, 14 II, 5 1L14 IV, 15 II, 2 I, 4 1,29 IV, 1 lV r 6 1,42 IV, 5 IV, 6 11,22 II, 38 11,40 11,33 III, 4 11,26 11,22 11,11 GLOSSARY OF Mlk.\ 157 hgii* shang hsu 1 tu* hstian 4 sluing Jisilan* shim* hstich* ch'ai 1 hxiifh" rh'it'H liKiich- fang hsiieh* hsi* hsiiehHzu hsiiek* wen chien hsiin hsiin*fu 7/XM/l 2 i* A.vu/t' kua-n hsiin 4 ming' 1 hu* cliao hu* kxiang 1 hu* jan- liu" 1 sliang hu* shuo* hu * sung hu l ton 3 ?tu* t'ung fiu 1 wei hit- if en - hua' z chich hua- ch'iian- hua* la hua 1 jt'ing- hua - shang l hua 4 sthuo Auai 4 shih* Kuan" 1 chiarh huan* cJi'wg 1 huan- lid huan* nang t \ an undeserved reputation to replenish, till up again my age is to select for a vacancy to allot, assign, to a post g a Literary Chancellorship K 3 scanty learning | a school to practise, learn boots 3 learning, studies || stock of learning, scholarship 3$> $$ a sub-district Deputy Magistrate ffHj JM to recover a debt after formal exam. debtor J(K jljffi a Governor of a province p $ the City Police of Peking $L If Police officials gHrf I|fJ to examine, interrogate lj| /]ft a Passport S 19 mutually ^ ^ suddenly till* Jf jfgB Hu province of Hupei $8 _h to paste on SJ i8l to talk nonsense ^| S to escort p\ 5j* measures of capacity '$S ft (sometimes 7i?^ 2 t'ungrh ') a side street PHI ^ the Imperial Body guard JQ "g wild, reckless, language $f ^ packing straw Tu ^ to spend money iW ^ to pl ft y worra j$rj $2 to brush or sweep away ^f ^ a flower-vase 1^ ]j a Chinese merchant fj |S something to say J|5f Ipf to do harm, to mar S M ^ to offer a price ^ Jra to repay in full JM ^a ^ gi ye back to ^ ^ emoluments, private fortune of mm IV, 16 III, 2 I, 2 II, 9 iv, ir, IV, 2 IV, 15 1,28 IV, 4 III, 5 1,30 IV, 16 11,32 IV, 10 IV, 5 IV, 13 II, 6 IV, 8 IV, 5 IV, 18 1,28 IV, 18 III, 17 III, 15 IV, 3 11,12 II, 1 11,39 IV, 5 III, 17 II, 17 11,39 III, 14 III, 7 IV, 8 II, 9 I, 16 111,19 IV, 7 11,22 II, 22 158 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. huan* shang huang 3 chia* huang* chiu(V huang 9 hu> huang* kua huang* shang huang 1 sit huang 4 tang huang 1 Vang huang* ti* huang 9 tzu huang* yu' 1 hui* chi* hui* chia 1 hui*ch l ien* hui*fu hui*hsinW hui*hsnn* hui* kai* hui* kuan 3 hui* lai hui* mien* hui- ining- hui*pai* hui* pan* hui* ping (V hui*shih* hui- shoii 3 hui**hou* hui* ta hui*t l ung* hui 3 tzn (sic) hui* wen* hun* shen W hung* cli'a* hung* ch'i* hung* chiu 3 hung 3 hung* (of clothes, etc.) to change, put on other an exorbitant price yellow wine vague cucumber the Emperor dispersed, dissipated to jolt, shake reckless, wild the Emperor a shopsign butter to return to one's native place to go home to club together a sum of money to go back to give an answer to a letter in reply joint investigation to reform a Guildhouse, a club to come back to meet one another to give a message to to return a visit joint management or control (of servants) If you please, ^ir the Metropolitan Examinations (a blow, etc.) in return the President of a club to reply in a minute, and then conjointly a while an official reply, a despatch in reply all over one's body black tea a Stamped Title Deed red wine, claret to swindle good fortune III, 18 III, 19 III, II II, 16 III, 4 I, 35 IV, 16 III, 17 1 1. 33 IV, 3 11,29 III, 3 IV, 15 I. 35 IV, 17 II, 2 11,17 II, 16 IV, 6 II, 16 11,17 1,21 IV, 14 IV, 5 IV, 4 IV, 18 II, 4 II, 5 11,35 IV, 17 II, 35 II, 14 IV, 6 II, 11 IV, 8 I, 5 III, 2 II, 8 III, 7 II, 26 11,20 GLOSSAUY OF 1'IlllASKS. 159 lino ' rfi'e* huo 3 chi huo- a I i HO ' 2'ao 1 hno* parh ' /lift' 4 Wtt(4) IJdl- / 3 ching i-ch'uckd) i } chwn 3 / ' rhung i*f* i'hou* i' 1 huo i z kai* i- k'uairk* i*lai* i 1 Hang 3 i ' ahang i 1 ssu i- snngrk* i-ting* i* ting 4 -asa a bhopiiiun, :i.-ci.-taut -3a i 1 t'wng' 2 i- t:u a wagon (vulg. Aw-0 3 a torch on joint account, jointly a bale a fellow-workman a chafing-dish to conspire goods money for goods supplied all together altogether the result being already a vacancy caused by promotion for certain in one's thoughts, in the mind's eye clothing afterwards favorably mentioned by the Board of Civil Office to doubt, suspect entirely, altogether together in the first place one or two uniformly, equally to criticise, discuss clothes heartily at once, all at once (of doctors) methods of meaping, intention the single journey system of medicine a little, somewhat certainly to settle definitively with the intention of, to mean to very early together soap IV, 13 1,13 11,27 11,27 IV, 8 III, 9 III, 2 11,26 H, 2 IV, 10 IV, 17 IV, 15 IV, 6 I, 2 11,24 IV, 4 II, 24 I, * I, 8 IV, 15 11,29 11,27 1,14 IV, 4 II, 1 IV, 9 11,11 11,30 IV, 1 II, 1 III, 7 11,10 III, 6 III, 7 I, 7 1,11 IV, 7 . IV, 5 IV, 7 I, W III, 3 160 THE GCIDE TO KL'AN UL'A. jao'' shu je* nao jen 4 cluing ' j^t* chen, 1 jen- chia jen- eh 1 ing ( 2 ) jen- ksing jen-hsing- jiti jen' 2 min- jentp'ci- jen* skill jen 4 so 3 jen- wu jih* ch'i- jih* clcien- jih* hsin 1 o* han* ju,- chin ju' 2 ho- zii jung- hsia- r- hnng'- jung - jen a chair unforeseen, unexpected treatment and medicines to prosecute one's studies but yet, still, nevertheless afterwards to overlook, pardon lively, bustling to confess, acknowledge a charge zealous people, others popular character disposition human nature at will, at discretion the populace, population to acknowledge a liability to pay to recognise place of appointment (also^e/i- zuM 4 ), mankind, man as before, once more a diary a date on a former day [or] occasion in the future ever fresh a day a good many, a good deal so much, a certain amount at present how if in full a mattress-cover a mattress thus soft stuff things considerateness. consideration your departure easy your post 11,31 IV, 5 III, 7 IV, 16 IV. 9 II, 12 III, 4 II, 35 III, 15 1.36 L34 IV, 4 II, L'5 II, 26 IV, 9 IV, 5 IV, 6 IV, 20 IV, 15 I, 29 IV, 8 11,38 IV, 16 IV, 2 IV, 5 IV, 16 I, 7 IV, 13 IV, 9 1,13 11,29 IV, 8 II, 1 III, 17 III, 6 II, 5 III, 17 IV, 18 IV, 4 I, 19 It, 5 GLOSSARY Of PHRASMS. 161 jung*y ing* ka* larh- Wa* la kai'jih 4 kai 3 #//"' kai 4 sliamj kai 1 tang 1 uan, Wai* fa Wai* fan* Wai* ku-i 1 Wai* Wai Wai 1 shift 4 Wai* shui 3 Wai* yin 4 kan 9 chi kan* ch l i kan* chick* ban* chin 3 kan* ching kan 3 cWing kan 3 cWing* kan 3 ksieh 4 kan 4 lien 4 kan* su kan 3 tai 4 kan' 3 tang 1 kan 3 tao(V kan* tzu kan 3 tz& Wan 4 cliien Wan 3 chierh 1 Wan 3 Wai Wan 4 ming 2 kang* ttfai 2 Wang* cliien Wang*t'ai 4 kao* cilia* your incumbency (of a post) IV, 2 ft c r ner III, 9 Russian cloth IV, 8 on another day IV, 7 to reform 11,25 to cover over III, 10 ought, should II, 1 1 another day II, 2 to set sail II, 30 to disburse, pay out II, 10 to serve dinner III, 4 (of clubs, societies) to open, meet IV, 17 to open II, 29 to begin business II, 9 boiling water III, 2 to denounce specifically IV, 6 to open an office after New Year II, 4 to be grateful I, 40 an attack of spleen IT, 27 a voluntary Bond IV, 9 at once, without loss of time II, 12 clean II, -10 really ! actually ! II, 14 gratitude IV, 7 grateful IV, 7 competent, skilled II. 38 province of Kansu II 2i) sentiment of gratitude IV, 16 to venture to accept (a compliment, etc.) IV, 1 (of time) by, by the time that I, 23 a pole, rod II, 12 I daresay III, 1 to see 1, 25 a waistcoat HI, 5 to hack or split open 11,28 to find by inspection IV, 8 to see through, discover I, n just, jut now I t 38 robust I, 2 robust IV, 3 to apply for leave IV, 11 THE GUIDE TO KUAN I1UA. kan* chili kao 1 hsitig* kao 1 liang kao 4 ping * "kao l shou ' kao* sung k l ao 3 shang Vao 3 to (3) ken 1 kuan 1 ken l t'ou (sic) k'en 3 ch'iuV) keng* chih ko- chili* ko- chu- ko- hsia ko^j&ti ko } ko ko 1 kuo- ko- shan ko*sheng 3 ko l tzu ko- tzu ko* tzu* k l o z eh'iao 3 k'o 3 chioi 1 k'o 3 hsi 1 fc'o 2 hsiang* k l o 3 hsin 4 *'( 2 1(3) tning- to acquaint, inform of I V, 4 (your) success at the examination IV, 12 enjoyable I, 14 millet III. 16 to apply for sick-leave H> 24 your age (to elderly or old persons) I) 2 (commonly also kao* sii) to inform, to tell I, 42 to pass (an examination) H 24 to apply corporal punishment II 38 in the family of, a child of I 38 a personal attendant II, 21 to be a private servant of an official II, 17 a tumble I> 45 to entreat, beg I, 19 unyielding, stiff I, 42 to cashier II, 22 each place, every whnv I, 17 a standard, prescribed method or form IV, 1 Sir I, 19 (also ko-jeti), each one, oneself 1, 35 an elder brother II, 17 all countries, all the Powers IV, 5 a screen I, 16 all the provinces IV, 5 a pigeon II, 32 a shelf, partition III, 2 by oneself IV, 17 irritating, aggravating II, 26 by pure chance, as it happened II, 21 apparent, obvious IV, 6 the Board Office (in a provincial Yamen) IV, 5, the General Office (.Peking) IV, 13 the year of taking a Degree II, 5 detestable, to detest II, 27 pitiful, a pity I, 31 to long for I, 4 amusing I, 44 trustworthy, credible IV, 6 can, may, will I, 8 a stranger, visitor II, 19 literary reputation, honours IV, 12 to be feared or apprehended II, 1 OF PHRASES. 168 k'o'skik* k'o'go k'o l ta k'o'tien 4 k'o*t'ing l k'o l t'ou- Vo a wu* kou * sung * kou, 1 yerh 3 k'ou* hsia k'ou 4 liu* k'ou 3 mo* Vou'tztt k'ou 3 tvei k'ou 3 y in (i) ku'chi ku * chiao l u niang kitting* ku 1 tung 1 ku*tz'u* ku 3 wan' 2 *'* k l u l lung k'u* tzZ kua'cfrih 3 kua* hsin 1 kua* mien 4 kua 4 tzu kua 1 tzttrh* k'ua 1 k'ou 3 kuai 3 nark 1 k'uai* tzu kuan 1 ck'ai 1 a to be hard upon I, 42 but, now I, 7 a cough I, 7 to knock out, clean by knocking III, 10 an inn II, 81 a drawing-room, reception-room II, 9 to kotow IV, 2 detestable, hateful II, 26 to take legal action IV, 19 the mouth of a drain III, 16 mode of deducting III, 20 to deduct, subtract II, 6 to detain IV, 7 mushrooms from beyond the Great Wall III, 19 an arch, tunnel III, 6 taste III, 11 accent, pronunciation IV, 18 historical objects, antiquities IV, 3 a longstanding friendship IV, 1 second-hand clothes II, 37 the ancients II, 27 a girl I, 38 to hire, engage definitively IV, 7 noise of a heavy fall II, 25 for that reason I, 3 antiques, curios II, 17 degree of wretchedness II, 23 a coolie III, 9 a hole II, 30 a misfortune, hardship II, 34 trousers III, 5 (worth) mention IV, 1 to blow 11,24 kind regards, consideration IV, 2 strips of dough III, 19 a coat III, 5 melon-seeds 1, 41 to boast II, 39 a corner, round the corner I, 28 chopsticks III, 4 an official duty or mission II, 18 164 THE GUIDE TO KCAN 11UA. kuan 3 chang* kuan l chao (4) kuan 1 hsi kuan 1 hua kuan 1 k'an* kuan 1 inaorh* kuan 1 min 2 kuan 1 ming - kuan* pao(%) kuan 3 shih* kuan 1 ssu kuan 1 ti* kuan ' tsorh 4 kuan* tzu k'uan 1 shu kuang l ching kuang l jun kuang 1 ku* kuang 1 lin 2 kuang 4 miao* kuang 3 tung k'uang* ck'ieh 3 ttuang 1 p l ien* kuei* ch'u* kuei* chu kuei* hang- kuei* Jisia kuei* hsing* kuci 1 huan kuci* kan* kuei* keng 1 i 1 pen 3 kuei 1 shang ItueiHzu kv-ei'yU* k'uei 1 k'ung k l uei } tuan 3 kun*tzu 1 chung to keep the accounts II, 30 kind attention I, 7 to relate to, affect IV, 3 the " Mandarin " dialect I, 17 to view, gaze at, stare at IV, 6 official servants' hats III, 6 officials and private persons IV, 5 official name (cognomen) I, 3 no doubt (also pronounced kuam 2 mo) II, 16 to act as steward II, 14 legal proceedings II, 12 the God of War IV, 17 a Box at a theatre III, 11 ajar III, 2 to forgive, pardon III, 15 circumstances, probably III, 14 lustrous I, 12 the honour of your visit IV, 2 your visit IV, 7 to visit a temple III, 6 province of Kuangtung H 2 moreover II, 5 to defraud II , 26 your native place I, 1 rules, customary modes I, 30 your Firm 1 1, 1^ to kneel down II, 35 your surname I, 1 to repay, reimburse IV, 10 your business, your object II, 2 your age IV, 2 your country, Government IV, 1 to repay a capital sum IV, 19 to pay up, repay H 23 a cupboard, press III, 2 your illness I, 7 your lodging IV, 18 a deficit II, 23 a deficit II, 22 a stick II, 25 (your) brothers I, 1 GLOSSARY OF I'll HAS US. 1.;:, xhang kung ' ch'cny kung ' 1^ WHL-. 11,10 fft |$ to serve, fullil duties I V, 15 ^ Wi respect, deference IV, 1 fit /ft to state in evidence IV, 8 ^ to publicly elect IV, 16 *"fc ^ time, leisure II, 4 ^ f^ to await IV, 18 ^ ^ your position, status I, 3 fib gjj[ to admit in evidence IV, 'J Q | a residence, (in Peking, a Legation) II, 7 S)] ft a title, decoration II, 37 impartial IV, 1 public business I, 35 an Official Writership II, 24 to state in evidence IV, 6 W a public office IV, 8 $I fair.just 11,11 | in all, the total II, 18 |fl] publicly and together IV, 8 fj official business IV, 20 it just, equitable IV, 9 ?H to sue for IV, 10 "S 1 to bring a charge against IV, 10 fQ to fear that, expect that II, 29 SC politics, statesmanship IV, 3 ^ the State, the Imperial House . II, 22 ~|% to be too flattering II, 5 i transfer [or] passing of money II, 27 feC to go over or across I, 4 ^ actually, in the event II, 22 f to come over or across I, 4 ffS to pass en route II, 15 ^P the New Year II, 13 ft a Royal Letter, a Letter of Credence IV, 1 Ss, to hold a sitting of Court II, 19 -f- fruit II, 13 "tA. u\ too, excessive, over II, 24 S a candle II, 7 El there and back III, 6 166 THE GWDE TO KUAN HtU. lai 4 lien 3 lai 2 wany(S) few 2 huo* Ian* kuci* Za 4 Zar/t 1 (sic) Ian* lil Ian 3 tai lao' 1 cliia* Iao 3 hsiung* lao 3 Tiuiig lao- ping lao 3 sMli l lao*ti* lao' 2 tung Iao 3 tz& tzu lao 3 yclt Ze 4 ling ' lei' 1 chvi lei* fain* lei* k l tn U- chien Zi 4 c/t'ww li* hai ?i 4 7t#i 11 3 /mi (4) Zi 4 /feV 11 4 lien ^ 4 *> U 3 inao(*) Zi 4 ^ai 4 li*tang l Zi 3 fow Zi 3 ^M Zi 3 wu liang- hsin liang- ttuai Hang' 1 shih liang- shut 3 J4 to have the face to intimacy, intercourse with cloisonne' ware (the name in the trade) a shop-counter P u 1py> t a pulp in rags, tattered disinclined to I am much obliged to you for your trouble you, Sir consumption a tutor, master an old or skil ' e( i hand you (to an equal younger than oneself) to trouble, disturb (polite) a father (lao- tzu, when = name of the philosopher) means, something to live upon (an official title) to compel bother, trouble, annoyance - trouble, anxiety (excuse me for) putting you to the trouble to estrange interest on money dreadful, also a common superlative interest on money to notice, observe (also Zi 4 ^o 3 ), at once trained, practised tidy polite, courteous dynasties (of a formality) Quite correct ! inside plums a present conscience cool S rain (or liang- shu'rk 3 ). cold water *' 37< II, 25 II, 7 II, 6 I, 41 II, 31 I, 14 I, 4 II, 5 IJ 29 II, 14 1,10 II, 39 II, 3 I, 8 I, 33 II, 39 II, 4 IV, 8 III, 6 II, 2 11,14 JI 1]l 11,11 II, 9 1.23 II, 9 11,39 11,32 III, 1 111,15 11,35 I, 29 IV, 1 11,11 III, 19 III, 17 II, 16 I, 24 n 10 111,16 CLOSSAUY OF :PHBASES. 167 Hang* tao* lib* ssu men 2 ting men 2 tzu to buy and mien 2 ch'iang (V jjj gj{ mien ' clilcn l j|f Jjjj stables to smooth, stroke twine, hemp-cord stirrups a landing, place a closetool to buy oneself to buy goods to sell goods to sell to trade (but mai 3 mai*, when to sell) to ignore (of speaking) profusely by and by all over the place at a loss a w.-c. trade, commerce at random, inconsiderately a defect, blemish, fault the fur of skins hasty, incautious a w.-c. a hat coal-balls every , every time that every day a younger sister every year every month under the tuition of gateway, doorway a frontage the pulses (also men* ssii 3 ), to bore or worry to death a door-keeper, porter (in certain phrases) the family, household grains of rice far separated under constraint or compulsion to see personally in, 16 III, 10 III, 14 III, 16 11,28 III, 8 11,23 II, 31 II, 2 11,32 I, 3 1,30 IV, 5 1,13 1,43 IV, 13 11,29 III, 12 1,18 11,17 III, 10 11,33 III, 8 III, 18 III, 4 IV, 17 IV, 6 11,30 11,12 II, 1 11,39 I, 28 II, 9 II, 2 11,40 IV, 5 II, 17 III, 7 IV, 20 III, 18 IV, 5 GLOSSARY OF 1'llRASKS. 109 * ch'iu' 1 mien" 1 hua mien* ling 3 wit- n'* pei* mien* shan* mien * sliang mien* Van* mien* tzu in in 3 chwk- ming* pai ming- p l ten ming'- sheng tiling* sheng ming* shili 1 ming * Vien ming* tsao 3 ming * tzu ming*t:W: ming 2 yen' 2 mo*fei l mo*jo* mo* shang 1 mo'- ts'eng mo* wei 3 mu ' chiang mu 3 cWin mu* I'iao mu* pan 3 mu* tso na* chu na*fu* na* Wai na* lai na* tsei* nan* jin nan* mien 3 nan* pie n nan*tao(*> nan* wei to beg personally IV, 6 cotton II, 33 to receive in person IV, 18 (foreign) bread II Ii 3 a lined coverlet III, 17 familiar by face I, 18 to consult personally IV, 10 to have a personal interview with IV, 5 ineal, flour III, 7 intelligent, quick IV, 4 to-morrow IV, 4 clear, to understand I, 35 a visiting-card III, 7 reputation II, 27 celebrated I, 20 a celebrated teacher IV, 1G to-morrow I, 4 to-morrow morning IV, 4 a name 1,81 one's number in a series IV, 1G to express, declare explicitly IV, 9 it is certain that II, 11 better to, just as well to II, 1 1 to damage by rubbing or knocking III, i) to dawdle III, 4 the end of, the last II, 3i) a carpenter II, 10 a mother II, 17 timber II, 10 planks II, 13 carpentering II, 17 to catch hold of, hold fast II, 30 to enjoy oneself II, 23 to take away I, 22 to bring II, 7 to capture a thief II, 22 a man (as opposed to a woman), a husband II, 30 inevitably I, G southern II, 9 do you mean to say? I, 44 to be hard on, ill-treat ' II, 40 170 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. nao*tai nao*tsei 2 Mi* li neng 2 kou ni 3 men niarh 2 men nien 2 ck'ing* nien 2 haia nien 2 mai* nien* shu 1 nien 2 sui nien 2 t'ourh niu 2 jou niu 2 nai 3 niu 3 tzu niu* ying 1 no 2 yung* nu 3 jen nuny* ch'ien 2 nung * nung*t'u 3 o 3 lisin (sic) ou-fen* pa 1 cJiieh pai* Tisia 2 pai* Jiui pai 2 jih pai* Wo* pai* nien 2 pai 2 sliili pai* shih 1 pai* shou* fpT H the head a robbery, brigandage the Palace to be able you women to bring a false charge age young age the end of the year aged age, years of age the harvest, year's yield beef milk buttons, studs unfitted to undertake (a high post, etc.) to misappropriate to make great efforts a woman to handle (that is, with Chinese, to make) money to hold a private gambling-club to handle soil to swindle, defraud nausea to starve ground arrow-root by chance, should it happen that to push one's way Ofy.) to strive an unstamped Deed to call and inquire after a case for holding presents to pay a visit to daytime, daylight to pay visits or calls to make a New Year call a death in the family to make a student's obeisance to a teacher to make a birthday call III, 7 11,30 11,39 1,34 1,38 III, 8 IV, 10 II, 17 IV, 4 IV, 4 11,25 IV, 18 11,25 IV, 2 II, 10 III, 4 III, 3 III, 5 IV, 1 II, 22 1,34 II, 27 II, 39 11,26 III, 18 11,26 III, 7 1,13 III, 19 11,13 1,34 II, 8 I, 4 III, 17 IV, 1 II, 13 1,10 II, 4 11,27 IV, 16 1,32 GLOSSARY Otf PHKASK.s. 171 pai*t'ang* pai* t'i* pai*ts'ai* pai* wang pai*yr>i.- pat* yen* p'ai* ch'ai 1 p'ai 4 kuan 1 p'ai- lou ^'04' mat 4 p l ai* yuan- pan 4 fa j!w 4 /two ' pan*li 3 pan l po s (sic) ^a/i 1 Ai/t 4 pan*teiigrk* pan* t'iot 1 pan, 3 tzu 2Jan l tz'u pan* yeh* pan* ch'a I!?' $} ^ p'an- suau p'an*tuan 4 p'an* tzu pang 1 pan (4) pang^tzu pang 4 tz% pang* yangtt) p'a?ig* ckangrk 4 jjao 3 cilia f$ pao 3 ch idt- fjjj poo* cJiii* pao 4 ch'ii 1 pao* ckiian 1 white sugar III, 3 daylight I, 21 cabbage III, 4 to make a call upon IV, 3 salt III, 4 to give a banquet 1 1, 3!) to send an official messenger , 11,15 to depute an officer II, 22 a memor ial gateway II, 1 to sell by auction III, 17 to appoint a deputy IV, 6 a measure, proceeding II, 11 to purchase goods II, 31 to deal with, act IV, 2 to drain a man of his money 11,27 to transact business 1, 36 a bench III, 6 a Sd while, " some time " II, 11 blows with a bamboo II, 32 relative rank IV, 16 midnight 11,22 to s P ir i fc away II, 31 to examine, check II, 22 travelling expenses II, 22 to spend (a holiday) IV, 4 to take stock II, 23 to think over, turn over in the niind II, 39 a judgment, decision IV, 9 a dish III, 4 to act as Assistant IV, 16 castanets 111,11 Indian corn 111,16 an example 1,36 the curtains of a cart III, 6 at the side, close by 11,33 a security, guarantee IV, 9 a written security IV, 14 to finish, complete (a building, etc.) Ill, 14 a gambling-house 11,17 to be hardly treated IV, 12 your wife IV, 18 172 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. pao* fang pao l fu pao 3 hao* pao 3 jen pao 1 kei pao 4 Jiuan 1 2>ao l Ian pao l p'ei pao 3 piao 1 pao 1 s Jiang pao 3 sJtetig ' pao 2 t'a 3 pao 3 tan 1 pao l tsu l pao z ten pao* tzii pao * ying p'ao 2 hai 3 pei 3 pierh pei 3 skang* pei* ts'an* pei* wo pel* yirh 1 pei* yun p'ei* cli'ang* p'ei* ch'ten* p'ei z cliiu 3 p'ei* Jiuan 2 pWfro* p'ei 2 pu 3 p l ei* shang p'ei*t l ao* pen 3 cJiia pen 3 cli^ien pen 3 chiu (4) pen 3 hsiang pen 3 iW pe/t 3 nienV) the Office of the Peking Gazette II, 2 a bundle, wrapper II, 7 your Firm I, 3 to protect, afford protection IV, 5 a security, guarantor III, 1 to make over to under contract II, 13 to give notice to the authorities II, 38 to undertake the management of IV, 10 to make good (a sum, etc.) II, 19 to escort Treasure II, 29 the gloss III, 10 to fold up III, 9 to recommend for promotion II, 5 a pagoda I, 22 a security-paper IV, 9 to guarantee, be security for, rent II, 1 hail II, 13 a poster I, 28 to recompense II, 16 (of carts) to go anywhere III, 6 northern II, 1 to go north (to Peking) IV, 3 to be denounced to the Throne II, 22 a coverlet I> 25 in the shade III, 10 bad luck II, 20 to repay, indemnify IV, 6 to lose money by a transaction II, 20 to keep one company at one's wine III, 11 to highly appreciate, be much impressed by IV, 18 to repay, reimburse IV, 9 to -entertain guests HI, H to make good (a debt, loss, etc.) IV, 9 to heap up III, 15 to fit a book in boards H 18 a blood relation II? 9 capital I) 13 would, should I 40 one's native place H 26 motive, desire, intention IV, 18 this year IV, 8 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 173 pen 3 shik pen* yiieli* 2>'cti l shang p'8ng~ I/ n pi*ch'u* pi* hang* pi* hsii* pi 3 kuarh* pi*jan z pi 4 kuan 3 pi* pi* nan* pi* ping pi 3 shang pi 3 shih z pi* shu 3 pi* tang 1 pi* tvan 1 pi z t'ung 3 pi* tz'u* p'i z ao 3 p ( i z ch'i p'i z hsiang p'i* j) ( i z la p'i* lei 2 p'V lo* p'i l p'ing p'i } tan 1 p'i 1 ting* piao 1 cli'e 1 piao 1 chih p'iao*tzu itfc at j /H in one's line II, 40 talents 1, 86 of this place II, 15 should have, would have J I, 4 this month IV, 8 to 8 pi rfc water from the mouth on III, 5 a friend I, 9 that place II, o my native place I, 1 - my Firm II, H must, obliged to IV, 2 formation of a character I, 30 certainly, necessarily IV, 4 my residence (official), (in Peking) our IV, 10 Legation my country or Government IV, 1 to make one's escape II, 25 an abuse, act of dishonesty, " something IV, 10 wrong " to compare with II, 14 at that time IV, 4 my Office IV, 1 shall not fail to IV, 4 an abuse IV, 10 a pen-vase II, 7 mutually, on both sides II, 8 will certainly, will not fail to I, 35 a fur-lined cloak II, 37 temper, temperament I, 6 a leather trunk II, 21 skins, furs II, 2 the breech III, 6 tough, strong III, 9 a thunder-clap I, 23 to be plucked at an examination IV, 12 to compare notes II, 39 a Note of Contract of Sale II, 19 to bargain to buy or sell IV, 8 treasure-carts II, 29 handsome, elegant 1, 38 a banknote II, 34 queer, strange, curious II, 25 174 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. push? cVu pick* jen pien* chia* pien 1 Jisiu 1 pien* lun* pien* tzii p'ien 1 ch'iao 3 p'ien 2 i (sic) p'ien* tzu p'in * cluing 3 p'in 3 ksing ping * cli'ieli 3 ping 3 c Men ( 4 ) ping 3 ckih l ping 3 fu(2) ping 3 k'ung* ping 3 ming 2 ping 3 pao* ping l pu ping 1 Vang* ping* Vieh ping l ting pin 1 tzu p'ing 2 an(V) p l ing z ch'ang 2 p l ing- chit p'ing 2 hsi 1 p'ing* hsin 4 p'ing 2 k'ou 3 p^ing* lino po } ch'uan 2 po z Using po l U po* li(V po 2 mu 3 p l o 4 huai* p'o l to } pu* cilia pu 3 c7MeJi* pu* kuan 3 elsewhere I, 17 other people II, 6 to realise the value IV, 9 a Hanlin Compiler IV, 15 to discuss, debate, argue IV, 6 a presentation tablet III, 17 the queue III, 18 by a coincidence, as it so happened II, 22 cheap II, 2 a card III, 17 to engage the services of IV, 9 habits, character I, 30 besides, moreover II, 26 to have an official interview with (a superior) IV, 16 to tell (a superior) to report in reply to lay a complaint or charge against to report to (a superior) to report to (a superior) the Board of War sugar-candy a Petition a private soldier a small, red, sourish, apple-like fruit (occ.p'ing 2 an 1 ), quiet, prosperous, without mishap ordinary proof westering, near setting to be believed, relied upon a mere verbal statement apples a lighter, cargo-boat ' the people, population a small present your mother (complimentary) to damage by breaking many, a large number of Oh no ! No, no ! to obtain a substantive appointment never mind III, 13 IV, 8 IV, 8 IV, 6 11,22 II, 1 III, 19 II, 5 11,39 III, 19 11,36 1,35 II, 16 II, 15 IV, 6 II, 16 III, 19 IV, 7 II, 5 III, 14 1,32 IV, 15 IV, 6 IV, 9 II, 9 IV, 16 1,16 GLOSSARY OF 1'IlliASES. 175 pit - kii.o ' }>}/- lino ' pu* pao 4 pu x/i Hi pu 3 tint/ 0f*l'0 pu'tzti pu 3 ya p'u } kai p'll* It'lU'l 1 p'n ' teung* p*n* pao* p'u 2 t'ao p'u 4 tzu sa ' huang 3 san 1 k'o 1 .-". san* kuan 3 H sang 3 tzu {^j| sao 3 Va* Jjj? *e 4 k'o ^ seng } jtn ska* kao 1 sha 1 kuo 1 sha } ssii ghat* aliang ksi shan } tuny sli any* c/re 1 shang* ch'i* tshang 3 4 chieli l chin 4 * cliing 1 shang* cfcii shany 1 ch'uan* sJiang* ch'uati" 1 only, merely I. 9 unexpectedly IV, 8 to repay (a kindness, etc.) I, 40 to patch up III 5 a fault I, 42 a patch III, 5 capital! I, 38. Quite right ! Exactly ! II, 1 an official's distinctive badge II, 39 a tonic I, 7 bedding II, 28 rules of a shop II, 17 to go on a fruitless errand III, 7 substantial security {lit. shop security) II, 1 W) 33 grapes III, 19 fj" a shop II, 2 !! to tell lies I, 11 Ifi^ ff!J tidy, (scarcely known in Peking) III, 18 ffl Three Examinations (in separate years) IV, 14 ^ for the Graduate's degree If* to " go down " from the Hanlin Yuan IV, 15 -f the throat, pitch of the voice I, 15 fj| to prepare for a guest IV, 4 %\\ miserly, close II, 30 j|J to press for, dun IV, 19 X a Buddhist priest 1, 31 fllj building-poles III, 14 $IrQ an earthenware pot II, 17 ^|j (sometimes sha 1 ssu 3 "), to kill by violence, II, 22 murder J^ to put out in the sun 111, 10 ^ a good measure, scheme, or plan IV, 8 ffi] Province of Shansi II, 31 3|C Province of Shantung III, 1 ]$ to get, or put, into a cart III, 6 2p& to lose one's temper II, 35 ^ a siesta II, 11 tto go into the street II, 36 to make progress, improve IV, 16 Jj^ to go up to Peking II, 16 ^ to go up I, 22 j|S a merchant- vessel IV, 6 M4 to go on board II, 21 176 THE GUIDE TO KUAN Ht)A. shang* fengrh* shang* hsia* shang* hsien 2 shang l hsin ' shang* hslu* shang* hid shang 2 huo shang 1 *(*) shang 1 je n shang* jen* shang 2 lid sliang * hung ' shang* lai shang 1 Hang Bhang* lien 3 shang 1 min 2 shang 1 pan* shang* piao 1 sluing* p icrh shang* shan* shang 3 shoud) shang* shui* shang* so 3 shang* tang 1 shang* t'ien 1 1 * t'ou '* tsoW shang* yu 2 shao 3 chicn* shao 1 chin (3) shao 1 shang shao* yeh she* chih 2 she* fa 3 she* hsia she* i 2 she* ti* shem 2 mo sheii l chin sheti 3 hsun* a present, " tip " 111,18 above and below, upper and lower II, 23 the High Authorities IV, 18 grieved, distressed II, 31 to get rusted III, 15 last time II, 18 (and s?iang 3 huo"), noon I, 20 to arrange in consultation IV, 8 a merchant IV, 7 to go to one's post . II, 3 (and shang 3 hci), to bestow on, give to III, 6 to commence work III, 20 to come up II, 28 to confer or consult with II, 8 to do one the honour or favour to I, 8 the mercantile classes IV, 1 to consult and take action IV, 1 to make flesh (of horses, etc.) Ill, 16 above, the upper side IV, 6 to ascend a hill II, 15 to do one the honour of accepting I, 32 to pay in Duties IV, 13 to turn the lock III, 17 to be taken in I, 6 Providence I, 13 above, on the top II, 16 to take the seat of honour IV, 1 the higher official circles II, 5 how do you do ! I 5 5 common Chinese spirits HI, 11 to light up III, 15 Master (So-and-so) III, 2 my nephew II, 9 my relative I, 38 to take measures, find means II, 31 my house H } 1 to become suspicious IV, 7 niy younger brother II, 28 what L 13 the gentry IV, 16 to try, hear, a case IV, 9 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 177 shen 1 shang ft J^ on one's person I, 4 shen 1 t'i 3 JJt (lS the P er80D > bodily frame IV, 15 shen* tzii Jj ^J- the body II, 14 sh vug* ch'eng ^ Wt a provincial capital I, 1 she/iff 1 ch'i* fe 3lt to get angry I, 39 slteng* chia* Ig ^ the Sacred Person (i.e. the Emperor) IV, 3 sheriff 1 fen c.*fr to fall out, quarrel II, 24 sheng 1 i jf? calling, business I, 13 sheng l j&n* (S f to be promoted II, 5 shetig 1 k'ou ^ P beasts (horses, mules, asses, etc.) 11,12 shetig 1 lai 2 ^fe ^K ^y nature, constitutionally I, 15 shetig 1 leng 3 fe /% raw and cold (of food) III, 7 jjjg HJ (of dinners) elaborate IV, 1 J? l| to create trouble or disturbance IV, 5 ill 11 the Sacred Person (i.e. the Emperor) IV, 3 sheriff 2 tzii || ~? string, cord II, 12 shcng* yinQ) ^ -jjj' tone of voice I, 15 skih* ch'ai 1 ^ SI a Chief Examinership IV, 2 shih 2 ch'ang* flj $f constant, chronic 11,24 flj g the time IV, 14 j| |^ truthful I, 11 shih 3 chiW & |g the Dynastic Histories 1, 29 shih* chiao 1 "tff ^ a hereditary friendship IV, 20 shih* chienW 3p 'pf matters, affairs IV, 2 s7w/A J ^/iiw<7 4 ^ r to owe an apology to I, 1 shih* ch'ing ijl '( a matter, event I, 16 shih* chutf) ^ 3 the person principally concerned in an affair II, 30 shih z ch'uehtt) ^ $fc a substantive post II, 3 shih 3 chung %} $ from first to last, all along II, 22 shih 2 fen -f ^ wholly, totally II, 39 shih*fou* life,1 whether or no IV, 8 shih ' fu ^P f|p a school-master, teacher 1, 28 shih 2 hourh ^p jp| 5d a time, the time when I, 16 *7w'7i 3 huan fj|* ^ to use, employ II, 23 shih 1 huiW ^ H" a Verse Club, Literary Club IV, 17 shih* jih ; this day, or, on that (future) day IV, 8 shih*lang f=f MR Vice- President of a Board IV, 2 *7*i7i 2 Zwi^ BJ ^ a season of the year II, 28 shih 1 p'ei 2 >^C ra excuse (my) leaving (you) II, 7 shih l p'iao ( 4 ) ^ ^^ a lost Banknote II, 6 shih l tao* >fe oC a robbery committed 11,30 178 TflB GUIDE TO KUAN flUA. s?tih* tou shih* Von shih 2 tsai shih*tuan l shift 4 wei 2 shih 1 wen* shift 4 MJttW shih ' yeh shih 1 i/ing* shou 2 an shou 1 ch'ang shou 1 cJt'eng shou 3 chih 4 shou 4 chili* shou 3 chin shou 3 fengrh 4 shou 1 hao shou 3 Jisien 4 shou 1 huo* shou 3 i shou 4 je 4 shou 3 hung shou 1 shih shou* teng 3 shu 1 cJian 3 shu 4 ch'anfj 2 shu 1 ch'i 3 shu 3 ch'i(V shu z chieh shu'fang* shu*fu shu l hsiu shu 1 kei shu 4 k'ou 3 shu l pan shu^p'u 4 P shu* shih 4 shu 1 fan to put to rights, to tidy I, 4 a stone I, 20 true, really I, 4 an affair, incident IV, 5 to be able to read II, 36 to regard as, consider IV, 6 verse and prose I, 30 affairs IV, 2 a Secretary in a Yamen II, 24 to miss receiving you IV, 2 well acquainted with IV, 18 the outcome, finale, result II, 23 harvest H, 12 to observe one's mourning IV, 15 to confer official rank IV, 15 a napkin, towel III, 16 the spaces between the fingers I> 44 an endorsement, receipt mark II, 34 the Chief Magistracy of a Prefecture IV, 11 to receive goods IV, 8 handicraft I, 13 to get overheated, have a feverish attack II, 28 handicraft II, 14 to repair II, 14 ; to pay one out II, 30 to be kept waiting II, 11 smoothed out, opened out III, 5 a Student Bachelor of the Hanlin IV, 15 a Despatch Writer, Secretary II, 24 heat of the sun I, 24 millet-stalks III, 14 a library II, 4 comfortable, in health II, 11 to accept a decision It, 9 salary (of secretaries, etc.) II, 24 to lose money to II 26 to rinse the mouth III, 3 a clerk, Writer IV, 5 a bookseller's II, 18 a magician, conjurer II, 31 to hold an acting appointment IV, 12 easy, comfortable II, 9 GLOSSARY OF PHtlASES. 179 sku 2 tang* shu 1 t'ao* nkn- 1 yiian* shua 3 ch'icn shua * pal 2 shua 1 shang shua ' tzH shua 1 ya 2 shuai 2 yiin 3 shuang 3 skui 2 clila skui 2 ekiaoW) skui 4 ckiao 4 skui 2 chili 1 skui 3 eking ft?iui 4 hsiang 4 skui 4 k l o 4 shui 3 lu 4 skui 3 mien 4 shun 4 plen * shuo 1 ckik 1 shuo 1 ho shuo 1 hua 4 skuo 1 k'ai skuo 1 li 3 so 2 ksing S0 2 i 3 so 2 sku 3 so 2 yu 3 ssu* cki* ssu 1 ck'ing 2 ssii 4 ck'ua?i ssu* hsiang ' ssii 4 hu ssH a jou 4 ssii 2 kuei ssii * micrk 4 ssu ' skih SSU SlbU su 2 clila to redeem a pawn II, 17 a book-cover II, 18 g a college IV, 16 |g to gamble II, 25 |^J (sometimes ska* pai 2 ), as white as a sheet II, 27 J^ to rub on III, 15 -f a brush III, 5 Jf to clean the teeth III, 3 ^ to consent off-hand IV, 16 >[$t brisk, cheery II, 30 |g what family ? 1, 38 jgj freight IV, 7 jg to sleep II, 29 ^|] who would have supposed ? IV, 5 J| crystal III, 6 JjH duties, dues IV, 7 ij|| duties, dues IV. 7 jfj!} by water, a water-route IV, 3 ]gj the surface of the water, sea, etc. IV, 6 -fig on one's way II, 18 ^H to verbally inform IV, 6 ^p to reconcile II, 19 |g to speak, talk I, 6 Hf| (sometimes shuo* k'ai 1 ) to come to, or, II, 29 bring about an understanding I!g to be reasonable, talk sense II, 25 ft just, simply II, 17 Jj^ consequently, therefore, so I, 15 )|| the subordinates of IV, 5 ^f all the I, 20 2p: the four seasons I, 27 Iffl private affairs or transactions IV, 9 )|| Province of Szechuen II, 31 JIB the villages round II, 39 ^^ to seem, seem somewhat IV, 9 ^ dead flesh, Jig. a wretched creature I, 37 3j a dead ma n II, 16 ffi JS on a11 sides > a ^ round III, 14 ^ private affairs II, 18 f the Four Books II, 40 l a y 1,31 B habitually I, 40 180 su* shih 2 suan* chang* suan * cWing ' suan* p< an suan 1 Peng 2 sui 2 ho sui - men * *ui*shurh sui* yiieh* sung* hsin* sung * Using 2 sung* li 3 ta*chia l ta* chia* t a* cilia* ta* chiao* ta 3 chicn* ta* i ta *jen ta* ta 3 k'ai ta* uiing- ta 3 pan t a 1 park* ta l pang l ta 3 pao 1 ta- p'ei ta" 1 sao ta* ssu tHfc GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. tU to know well, be well acquainted with IV, 14 ^ to cast up accounts II, 23 j^ to reckon up in full IV, 13 ^ an abacus II, 6 ^ sore, aching I, 5 fl] conciliatory, agreeable 1, 42 ^ although, (also sui 2 jan 2 ) I. 7 {j as on e pleases, at will I, 8 fsf to accompany in attendance IV, 16 Hx ^ one's age I, 44 /j months and years, lapse of time II, 24 flf to send a letter II, 36 \\ to bid one farewell II, 3 /fl to send a present III, 18 flj| to send a card of invitation IV, 14 I| a wagon, baggage-cart III, 9 IJC everybody, the whole party II, 1 your arrival, your visit IV, 18 to fight II, 6 your teaching, your words IV, 16 a main street, a high street II, 1 to take a meal when travelling II, 38 to send (a messenger) II, 14 exaggeration I, 6 thoughtless, careless III, 13 the title of the higher civil and military I, 32 authorities ; when preceded by the sur- name becomes tajen 2 , e.g. Li 3 tajen 2 (also ta* kai*), probably, in general II, 3 to open (baggage, etc.) I, 4 lit. the eldest brother ; you Sir II, 8 the front gate, principal gate III, 9 your name (cognomen), your reputation, I, 3, IV, 16 mode of dressing II, 37 u to bear one company I, 14 to travel in company II, 3 to make into a bundle III, 17 (of animals), coupled ; (of things), joined I, 44 together (ta 1 p'ei) to sweep III, 14 (also ta 2 ssu 3 ), to strike dead, kilt by beating II, 15 to think, intend I, 13 GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 181 ta* Ving ta* tt'ai* ta* wei- ta* yen 3 ta * yen l ta 1 ying ta* yu 3 ta*yiiek l tai*fu tai* lao 2 tai* lei tai* ling 3 tai* shang t'ai'aiM t'ai*chien(V t'ai* chierh 1 t'ai*fu* t'ai* shih* t'ai*skou(V t'ai* t'ai t'ai* yang tan 3 ta* tan 1 tai tan 1 tsou 3 tan l tzu tan 3 tzu tan l wu fan* korh* t l an } p'ei* t l an l tsang ' fan* ya tang 1 ch'ai* tang } ch'u 1 tang 1 cttiieh 1 tang 1 mien* tang 1 nien* tang* p^u tang l shih~ tang 3 shihM (sic) t to sort out in readiness III, 17 to inquire II, 1 great wealth It, 5 to hunt or shoot II* 15 to make a bad bargain, be let in II, 20 opium H> 25 to consent, agree, assent II, 6 a heavy rain II, 12 probably IV, 3 a shelf III, 7 a doctor I, 5 to tike trouble for another II, 38 to involve, get one into trouble II, 38 at the head of, in command of IV, 3 to take with one III, 8 your kindness I, 8 an Imperial eunuch II, 39 a flight of steps I, 46 your Style I, 1 a Hanlin Compiler IV, 12 a Prefect II, 5 a lady, wife of an official II, 37 the sun I, 24 presumptuous IV, 3 to make allowance, be tolerant to IV, 4 to travel alone II, 3 a Note, memorandum II, 18 the gall, courage II, 23 to delay, a delay III, 6 a Chinese spittoon III, 2 to contribute one's share of a payment, be IV, 9 proportionably liable for to be extortionate I, 36 to keep or restore order IV, 5 to be in an official position II, 1 at first II, 2 a Chief or Managing Clerk II, 40 to one's face, face to face II, 6 in former years II, 31 a Pawnbroker's II, 20 at that (former) time II, 16 to suppose it to be n, 6 182 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. Pang a huo kuan t'ang 2 sftang tao* ch'u tao*fa* tao*hsi 3 too* Jisieh* tao z jao* tao* t'ai tao* ti* tao*tsorh* tao l tzu t'ao*jao* t'ao 1 jung 2 t'ao 1 Jtou 1 t'ao* k'u t'ao 9 lun* t'ao*p'ao* t'ao* shang t'ao* yen* tt* hsia* if, in case of (1) District Authorities, (2) Heads of Departments t'e*p'ai* teng 1 ckaorh* t&ng* hou* teng 1 hurh* teng 1 kuangrk 1 teng l lung teng 1 miaorh 2 teng*tzu anywhere, everywhere to express thanks for a service to express congratulations to express thanks to trespass on (your) hospitality an Intendant of Circuit ( r tao * ^ (3) ). as a matter of fact rooms facing the main range in a Chinese house a knife to take advantage of your hospitality to polish and refine to cleanse drains leggings to seek advice or counsel from to abscond to put up into its cover annoying, a nuisance to find leisure (also t'e* t 4 ). on purpose to specially depute a lamp shade or globe to await t'eng* k'ung* ti* ch'i* ti*chu* ti*fang ti 3 lisia ti* lisia ti* hsiung ti* kci 6 light of a lamp i| a lantern "S SE the flame of a lamp -J^ small weighing scales 7p a bench, stool *1| to copy out f to empty out ^ a Title Deed for land if: the landlord, proprietor 55T a place h beneath, afterwards "F on the ground 7D brothers So to hand to II, 11 II, 39 ii? 32 IV, 5 IV, 19 II, 9 II, 25 IV, 1 IV, 6 I, 26 III, 9 III, 4 IV, 2 IV, 16 II, 40 II, 16 IV, 18 II, 22 III, 17 III, 11 IV, 18 I, 32 IV, 2 III, 15 IV, 5 IJ[ 40 II, 29 II, 25 III, 15 II, 36 II, 37 II, 38 III, 17 II, 8 IV, 14 I, 20 II) 1 II, 13 I, 1 in, 4 GLOSSARY OF PHKASKS. 183 ti ' m'nifjrh" ti* mil- ti*pan 3 ti* sTiih ti*t ( an 3 t'i* ksing t'i tzu tiao*tu(4) tiao* ssu t'iao^fu* t'i-ao 2 so t'iao l t'i* t'iao* tzu t'iao 2 yang t l 'iao z yiieh liehjfa ticli- slicing t'iek' 2 tzu Vieh 3 huo* tien* chi tien* clila tien 3 Tisin tie n* 7iu tien* pan (*) tien* ska tig tien* sliiTi t'ien 1 chia t'ien l Jisia t'ien 1 li 3 t'ien* p'ing t'ien* sliang Vien* tan 3 a iii-iKhbourinB landowner n:in " oi n " i> lace huxl, landeBtnto a floor a i[ P* a site a carpet to bow or hang the head ting* an* to act as a substitute for a servant, etc. respectable to shave the head a ladder, staircase to appoint to a post to arrange, dispose to kil1 or die by hanging a hanging scroU to incite, egg on to find fault with, disparage a strip of paper to take care of the health a Treaty mode of folding to fold up a plate ironwork to bear one in mind, remember inn-servants refreshments a tenant to find, advance, provide (money) on account II, 10 to fill in with, fill up interstices with III, 10 a District Police Master II, 39 the day long I, 33 the world, in the world II, 25 natural or divine justice II, 16 balance-scales II, 36 to add on II, 39 audacious, daring III, 13 fields and gardens 1, 31 to decide a case IV, 8 II, 12 in 9 II, 8 III, 14 n 39 II, 1 III, 9 II, 27 III, 4 Ill, 13 II, 25 III, 18 I, 22 II, 24 III, 9 II, 16 III, 17 II, 11 IV, 8 III, 11 I, 7 IV, 5 111,10 III, 10 III, 4 III, 16 III, 18 II, 29 II, 36 II, 8 180 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. tso* shih* tso* f-ang^ tsou 3 lu* tsou * ming 2 tsou* ts'an 1 tsou 3 tung ts^ou* ch'iao 3 ts'ou 4 pan* tsu 2 chicn* tsu ' Jisia tsu 2 lisin* tsu ' kei tsu 2 p'ing 2 tsu ' tzu tttu 1 chih 1 ts'u 1 chung* ts'u 4 hsia 2 ts'u 1 Inio- tsui* pa tsui 3 ying* t*'ui* t'ao* ttfui* tsaork 3 tsun 1 cliao* tsiui 1 hany 2 taun } lisiiig* tsun 1 hsun- tsun 1 i* tsun 1 kuei tsun 1 ming* tsun* pan* ts'un* chuang tsung l chi tsung 2 U 3 ts'ung" 2 ch'ang* ts'ung 2 hsin 1 ts'ung ' ming to be employed on business I, 8 to make soup III, 4 to hold a Court II, 35 yesterday I, 4 to thieve II, 25 to make a journey II, 29 to memorialise the Throne IV, 1 to impeach to the Throne IV, 5 to relieve nature, to be moved I, 25 a coincidence IV, 14 to raise, find (money) IV, 19 obvious, apparent IV, 2 to take on rent II, 1 credible, to be believed IV, 6 to rent or lease to II, 1 reliable IV, 6 rents II, 8 to be roughly acquainted with IV, 18 heavy III, 9 mean, ungenerous I, 45 heavy manual labour III, 18 blows on the mouth II, 35 stubborn, argumentative III, 15 to press for (a debt, etc.) IV, 10 dried and crisp " Chinese dates " III, 19 in accordance with IV, 5 your place in the family I, 3 your surname I, 3 to follow, be guided by IV, 4 your view or opinion IV, 8 honoured, honourable II, 39 to comply with (your) wishes IV, 4 to act as instructed IV, 10 a village II, 30 footsteps, whereabouts IV, 20 general control or management of IV, 2 permanent, thorough, well-considered IV, 9 anew, over again III, 1C able, clever II, 26 to obey orders, do as one is told II, 9 from this time forward II, 25 GLOSSARY OF 1'HllASKS. 187 tit* chang* gg l|jg a gambling-debt 11,26 i^ a gambling- sain. )ii 11,26 Jfet Governors-General and Governor- IV, 5 J ^ to study I, 29 tu 4 tai ffiffi girths 111,16 tu 4 tzu ttt -f the stomach 11,33 tu* yao 4 ^ U| poison, a poisonous drug II, 25 t'u*fu* H ft to acquire undeserved IV, 16 t'u 4 mo PH ^^ saliva, expectorations III 2 'w 8 wurli 4 jT r Q$Jj 5u local products III, 18 #$i JE (and tuan 1 chtng 4 ), correct 1, 30 Iff JtfSi to have foretold a thing II, 17 Hlf ^ to adjudge that shall IV, 9 ;J HI- to discuss between (themselves, etc.) IV, 7 4 5/J agreeable to, having a liking for IJ, 1 1 | Bf a store-room III, 10 3%J i$n to transfer (something received) to II, 32 $j ^ scrolls IU, 9 ^} ^ (of the game of morra), Quits ! II, 39 }fl 1$ to exhibit, display, the fullest IV, 18 jH j|3 to refuse and return (something) to IV, 8 JJ| foj to refuse and return (something) to IV, 8 fli K : ] to push open or apart II, 29 tlj| a bad or spurious Note II, 34 TU to repudiate IV, 8 jfl Hr to decline (a present, etc.) I, 32 ^ JB to swallow opium. II, 16 jfC iK the master of a household II, 9 rjit ilirf-t Sv Ira to excite the passions I, 44 3C S a thing, object I. 9 tto use force II, 39 ?C winter I, 27 fiy >uT schoolfellows I, *S pJ & (of congratulations) The same to you ! IV, 11 JS pip to send an identical Report to one's various II, 39 .^ official superiors |pj 7p[i a fellow-countryman, fellow-provincial II, 31 ill IJ to be conversant with, IV, 20 aH ^~J current everywhere I, 17 |^J A companions, colleagues II, 24 t'ung 1 fcai jj JB to clear, free from obstructions 111,16 '%w#'- w*e z ISJ ^P of the same year II, 24 tuan 4 chiu 4 tuan 4 ling 4 tui 4 ohiang 3 tui 4 chin 4 tui 1 fang tui 4 k'i tui 4 lien' 1 tui 4 slum 3 Vui ' Mitg* trui* huan* t'ui* hui* t'ui 1 lil-ai t'ui 4 yen tung 1 cilia tung 4 cfcing 1 * tung 1 lisi tung 4 sliou 3 tung 1 t'ien t'uiig" 1 eh'uang ' t'ung 2 lisi 3 t'ung 1 hsiang'* t l ung*hsiang l Vung ' hsiao* Vung ' lining (2) 188 THE GUIDE TO KUAN 11UA. t'ung* sken l Vung 1 ta Vung* yung- tzu 4 tzu } ch'ing 3 tzu 4 chii tzu 4 huarh 4 tzu 4 Jan- tzu 4 korh* tzu 4 tzu 1 sheriff* tzu 1 xkih 4 tzu 4 trung' 1 tzu 4 i/t-rh 3 tz'u' 2 ch l i tz'u 3 ch'u 4 tz'u 4 hnu tz'u- hxing- tz : u 4 jih 4 tz'u- kuau* t:'ii { Ituang 1 tz'u 3 xhih* wa l k'u wa ' ti 4 wal 4 hang- icai 4 hsiang wal 4 wal 4 mlerh 4 war 4 pio'h wal 4 sheng(Z) wal 4 t'ou wan 4 an 1 an Assistant Sub-Prefect II, 3 the same body or person IV, 4 conversant with II, 9 (or fung l jutyfy, as a concession, by way IV, 7 of obliging oneself I, 11 to move (an official equal) to IV, 5 a written Agreement or other document II, 14 scrolls of pictures and characters I, 19 naturally, of course I, 15 oneself, by oneself III, 2 self-shame, to feel painfully conscious of IV, 1 to advise (an official equal) of IV, 3 to give rise to, be the beginning of IV, 10 to breed, create, trouble IV, 5 writing copies, rubbings from inscriptions I, 29 from IV, 2 enunciation, pronunciation I, 15, 17 a phrase, expression II, 39 crockery III, 9 this place IV, 7 to attend on III, 1 to take one's leave II, 3 the following day IV, 5 to throw up one's employment II, 24 to accord (one) the honour of (your) company IV, 14 $& jf firm, strong Jtfc ^ft- this matter lit ^C this occasion I*i 15" to chaff, banter, ridicule # $ii lowlying land 71* "tT an outsider, not in the business yf* 7^ another part of the country s\* /N outsiders, strangers y\* \! a provincial appointment y\* B provincial officials yr ttfl .Tu externally yp j TG outside, out of doors III, 17 IV, 8 IV, 6 II, 39 II, 12 II, 13 II, 16 11,26 II, 8 I, 36 1,44 I, 5 the other provinces (viz., not that where the II, 16 speaker is) II, 2 IV, 13 outside perfectly quiet, altogether at ease wan*ch'ing l wan* fen* wan 4 i l wan 4 naii- wan 3 shang wang* hou 4 wang 4 ksiatig* wang 4 h'an (4) wang* ku 4 wang 3 lai 2 wang- ycli wei 2 eli'i wei'li 4 nei 4 mien 3 wei 2 nan 2 wei 2 sheng 1 wei 4 tao wei 2 tea wei 3 yuan men 2 cM 4 ive/b 4 liao* w8n*fai 4 wen- sku wen 3 tang men 1 IzU* wo 3 men wo wu 4 ch'ai 1 wu 4 chienW wu* hsi 4 wu 2 lisii 1 wu 2 nai* wu 4 pi- wu 3 pien* wu 2 ts'ai* wu 3 tso wu l ti$ t ff GLOSSARY OF PHfcABttfl, to make full payment in the highest d> 1 in 10,000, ,;'* possible very difficult, impossible late, in the afternoon or evening afterwards to be over eager or anxious to to go and see ; to visit the honour of your visit coming and going, to and fro His (or Your) Highness the Prince the game of weichi a slight attention to assist, be of service to inevitably to be in difficulty or trouble to depute, delegate for a living, as a livelihood" flavour the cover of a cart a Deputy writing materials dignified to ask after one's health a play of civil history a despatch safe, secure written characters, literature we a matshed to interfere with, prejudice one's official duties articles, objects a play of military history needless to (and wu* Zwrt 4 ), no matter unfortunately must, must positively petty military officials want of ability a corpse-examiner a room 189 IV, 7 IV, 14 11,14 IV, 9 III, 2 11,23 II, 2 IV, 14 IV, 6 IV, 17 11,40 IV, 1 11,31 II, 33 11,11 IV, 5 11,35 I, 9 III, 6 II, 5 III, 17 1,38 II, 3 III, 11 IV r 3 II, 23 IV, 20 1, 13 11,13 IV, 19 II, 7 III, 11 IV, 17 1,34 II, 11 III, 7 IV, 3 IV, 2 11,38 11,29 190 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. wu 2 wei* ya 2 chu 3 ya 2 men ya l shark ! ya 2 t'ieh ya ' t'ou ya 2 yi yang 3 chang* yang 2 ch'ien 2 yang* ch'ing 2 yang 2 fa yang 2 hang 2 yang 2 j&n yang 2 mao 2 yang 3 ping* yang 2 shang* yang 3 shen ' yang * tzii yang 2 yao* yao * chan * yao* ch'ien 2 yao 2 huang yao* liuang* yao* jj'u* yao* ghih yao* ting* yao* tzu y eh* chi 1 yell* citing ' yeh 3 chu 1 yeh'hsii yeh 3 mao 1 yeh*tso yen 1 ch'i* yen^cVih* yen 2 chin 3 yen 3 ching yen 1 chiiarJt 3 yen * fang * dull, "slow" your wishes, inetructions a Yamgn ( f the sun ) J U8t setting over the hills a Government licence a ma id-servant a Yamen runner to rel y u P n > trust to foreign dollars foreign (non-Chinese) affairs (and yang 9 fa"), mode of preserving health a foreign firm foreigners sheep's wool to nurse (one or oneself) in sickness a foreign merchant to take care of one's health a pattern foreign opium a druggist's to take money, to be venal important, material cantankerous, surly to shake, jolt to ask exorbitant prices a druggist's a key to ins ^ 8t on having the uppers of a boot a pheasant late at night a wild boar ( also y^ may be very possibly, perhaps, it a hare work at night *he sallow complexion of an opium-smoker to 8 ive strict orders strict cigars to inspect and release 11,39 IV, 4 II, 1 III, 10 II, 12 III, 5 II, 30 IV > 16 III, 12 IV, 18 IV, 1 II, H IV, 5 III, 10 II, 14 IV, 8 II. 11 II, 7 1 1, 23 II, 2 1,35 I, 9 II, 24 III, 17 III, 19 II, 17 III, 10 II, 21 III, 5 II, 15 II, 28 II, 15 II, 34 II, 15 II, 14 II, 25 IV, 5 I, 30 ! 44 III. 7 IV. 11 yen*horh- yen* lei* yen* lu* yen*ming* yen 9 mo* yen * p'arh - yen* s& yen* shih* yen l t'u 3 yen*Vu* yen* yu 3 yin 3 chien (4) yin* ch'ien yin 1 chuang* yin* kao* yin 1 hsin(t) yin 2 Tisin yin* Hang yin* p'arh* yin* p'iao* yin*se yin* shih* yin* ghurh* yin* tztt yin* tzU yin l tz l u 3 yin l wei ying * sheng ying ' tang l ying* yang* ying ' yiin (3) yu'ai* yu* ch'i* yu* chili W yu, * chung * yu 3 hsien* yu*jih* yu* yu* ui t GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 3 a salt-cellar tears a route to state expressly colour, colouring to hold an inquest opium, " drug " conversation, colloquy aa Audience money a dying declaration a Bank information, news, intelligence a letter of advice money ^ a bank-note |T oil for sealing fll the silver market, Exchange BK % amount of money ^ silver, sycee -^ a seal ; also, in certain phrases, loans for short periods j|fc owing to this, therefore J1& because [j|j| England, British J tricks |U (also y ing * ^^), ought J^ the Mexican Dollar ^ to promise to do as asked fi||- to impede, cause obstruction to Mi to be an gry if\ffi oiled paper Hi* * se ^ a ver y high value on |3| limited, a limited number or amount Q on an early day 181 * travel, make a tour Sf to act as P"vate secretary U greasy, sticky 191 III, 8 IV, 9 I, 12 II, 16 U, 23 ^ v ** IV, 19 n 17 II, 19 II, 16 II, 6 IV, 5 II, 36 IV, 13 in i2 II, 6 II, 7 III, 12 II, 8 II, 2 II, 36 IV, 9 I, 4 IV, 20 I, 34 I, 42 III, 12 IV, 5 IV, If 35 III, 17 IV, 1 III, 19 II, 5 IV, o IV, 16 III, 11 192 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. yu* ni* yu* skou yu 3 su* yu* wan yu 3 wang* yu 3 yuan* yii*ch l i yu* chien yii* hsien 1 yu* pei yii* pien* yii* shan* yu* shih yu*sliih* yii* so (^ y ii* ting* yii*t'ou yii* yen* yiian 3 ch'in } yuan* cJi'ing* yiian 1 ck'ti yuan*hsienM yiian* i (sic) yuan* i yiian* ku yuan* laiW yiian* Hang yiian 3 nien* yuan* pao* yiian* pen (3) yiian 1 po* yiian* shang yiian 3 sung* yiian* tzu yiian* tzu yiian* yang* yiieh 1 ch'i* yiieli * ch'u ' '.yiieh 1 hui kuang* sweat and dirt 111,16 to idle I, 33 (of scholarship), sound, thorough IV, 12 t travel for pleasure IV, 17 hopeful II, 11 there is a predestined connexion IV, 1 objects of art II, 17 my opinion, view IV, 8 to meet with, come across II, 20 beforehand IV, 4 to prepare I, 32 at a convenient opportunity IV, 20 an Imperial tneal II, 39 a Censor II, 39 when a matter occurs IV, 1 a lodging 11,22 to decide on beforehand II, 5 taro III, 4 an Imperial Banquet II, 39 a distant relative 11,20 dead black III, 5 a wrong, injustice IV, 9 in the first instance II, 9 (to say) a word, " breathe a syllable " II, 2(i (and yiian* i 4 ) willing II, 8 a cause, reason for II, 2 originally, in fact I, 25 to forgive, make allowance for IV, 2 thoughts of those far away IV, 4 the original statement IV, 6 original II, 24 (of learning), profound and extensive IV, 15 at the Governor's Yamen (or Viceroy's) II, 38 to accompany one far IV, 20 a garden II, 8 a courtyard II, 7 the original sample IV, 8 the time agreed on, the due date IV, 19 the beginning of the month II, 18 to invite III, 5 the moonbeams I, 23 GLOSSARY OF 193 yiich 4 liang yveh ' mo 1 shang ytitih 4 t'ourh* yvn 4 cl^i yiin 2 hsii* yun* liu yiln 2 nan yii/i 4 ton yun* ts'ai yung l chi 3 yung* ch'itn yung 4 hslang yung 4 hsin 1 yung 4 kung l yung 4 shan, 4 moonlight to think likely, suppose to invite the end of the month the beginning of the month luck to consent viscous, semi-liquid province of Yunnan a box-iron clouds to crowd a Salesman's fee an outlay, call for money to take pains to work, study to " partake of refreshment ' for ever 1,21 II, 8 IV, 17 II, 18 III, 9 II, 15 IV, 16 III, 7 11,24 III, 5 I, 23 IV, 5 II, 12 11,21 I, 6 III, 7 11,39 11,27 SHANGHAI: KKLLY & WALSH, LIMITED, TCINTEUS, THE 1 8 9 S . RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 6 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS DUE AS STAMPED BELOW SENT ON ILL SEP J * 1994 U.C.BERKELEY FORM NO. DD 19 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY BERKELEY, CA 94720 s YC 673 751488 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY